JP7237762B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine on which games can be played.

As a gaming machine, game balls, which are game media, are shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game balls enter a prize winning area such as a prize winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, the game state (game There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (ie, more specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player.

After setting a predetermined number of bets for one game of predetermined game media, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player starts each variable display. By operating a stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is stopped. Winning occurs according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, predetermined game media are paid out according to the winning, and when a specific winning occurs, the game state is changed to a predetermined game value by the player. (so-called slot machines).

The game value is defined as the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. It is to generate a right or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time and are stopped and shaken in a state in which they match a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Conventionally, as a game machine, a suggestive effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state and a preparatory effect predicting that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. be. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes an effect of stocking (displaying) arrows that change the pending display around the pending display.

JP 2017-131277 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is a possibility that the interest may rather decrease due to the execution of another effect during the execution of the effect that raises the degree of expectation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that can maintain interest.

(Means A) The game machine according to the present invention is
A game machine capable of performing a game and controlling it to an advantageous state for a player,
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state;
image display means capable of displaying a specific image and a predetermined image different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state, unlike the specific effect;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
The specific effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of specific effects including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect,
The image display means is
As the specific image, at least a first specific image corresponding to the first specific effect can be displayed and a second specific image corresponding to the second specific effect can be displayed,
It is possible to display the specific image according to the normal mode and the specific image according to the special mode that suggests that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal mode,
The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
The image display means is
When displaying the specific image according to the special mode, the specific image can be displayed using a first special effect element,
When displaying the specific image in the normal mode, the specific image can be displayed using a second special effect element different from the first special effect element,
a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect when the specific image is displayed using the first special effect element;
The notification effect executing means does not execute the notification effect when the specific image is displayed using the second special effect element,
The suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and a effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect. a third suggestive effect in which the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is lower than that of the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel in the same period and independently of each other,
The third suggestion is higher when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. production is easy to execute,
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (means 1) the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs a game and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. Specific effect execution means (for example, step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including super reach A to C, and step 097IWS106, S305 and an image display means capable of displaying a specific image (e.g., chance-up image) and a predetermined image (e.g., character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. (For example, step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU120 step 097IWS104 to select a process table containing super reach A ~ C and chance up effect and execute steps 097IWS106, S305), and the specific effect execution means is at least the first A plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including a specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B) can be executed, and the image display means displays a specific image As, at least, the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4) can be displayed during execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image ( For example, an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3) can be displayed, and a specific image according to a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation of being controlled in a more advantageous state than the normal mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow colors) and a specific image can be displayed, and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to expectations controlled in an advantageous state (for example, FIGS. As shown in 9-16, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 do not change in display mode), and the image display means displays a first special effect element (for example, blue, green, The specific image can be displayed by adding an effect image of red and rainbow display colors), and when displaying the specific image in the normal mode, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, white 9-9 to 9-16), and is controlled to an advantageous state during execution of the first specific effect. The first specific image can be displayed in different modes (e.g., blue, green, red, rainbow colors) depending on the degree of expectation to be displayed, and the first special effect element (e.g., , blue, green, red, and rainbow display color effect images) can be added to display the first specific image (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16), and furthermore, it is controlled in an advantageous state Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, pending display notice effect, timer effect, chance notice effect, etc.), and a notice that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. a preparation effect execution means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.); A second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the suggestive effect and a third suggestive effect (for example, a chance preview effect) different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are included, and the preparation effect is , a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect), and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed (for example, a timer preparation effect etc.), and the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 11-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the first preparation effect The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when either the effect or the second preparation effect is being executed (for example, 11-10). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is the preview image, and to draw the player's attention to the specific image. Moreover, the difference in the mode of the specific image can be emphasized by the display mode of the added first special effect element. In addition, interest can be favorably maintained.

(Means 2) In the case of means 1, the image display means is capable of displaying images of a common aspect (for example, image X) as the first specific image and the second specific image, and the images of the common aspect are displayed. , the first specific image and the second specific image can be displayed by adding a common first special effect element (for example, a rainbow display color effect image) (see FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5). ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

(Means 3) In means 1 or 2, when the specific image is displayed with the addition of the first special effect element, notification effect execution means (for example, effect A part for executing step 097IWS311 in the control CPU 120), and the notification effect execution means does not execute the notification effect when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured such that when Y in step 097IWS310, the process does not proceed to step 097IWS311). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware only when there is a high degree of expectation that the control will be in an advantageous state.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to 3, the image display means provides an effect (for example, chance Up effects A7, B7, C5) can be executed (see FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6). According to such a configuration, even when the specific image is displayed with the addition of the second special effect element, the sense of anticipation can be maintained.

(Means 5) In any one of means 1 to 4, the specific effect execution means includes a first period effect (for example, effect in the first half of the effect period of Super Reach A to C), and the first A second period effect (for example, the effect in the second half of the effect period of Super Reach A to C) including a effect to notify whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state after the period (for example, result notification) The image display means can display the specific image during the first period, and restricts the display of the specific image during the second period (see FIG. 9-8). may be configured. According to such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be focused on whether or not the control is to be in an advantageous state.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to 5, a game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player ( For example, in a pachinko game machine 1), a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses a pattern setting suggestion based on any of PT-1 to PT-7, or reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9), and the effect mode of the predetermined effect is controlled in an advantageous state Special aspects that suggest things (for example, reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 that is a special pattern) and specific aspects that suggest settings (for example, patterns PT-1 to PT that are specific patterns -7), and the predetermined effect execution means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, when the variable display of the symbol is started) (Timing before the variable display mode becomes ready-to-win) when a predetermined period has passed since (for example, the effect control CPU 120 However, in the effect determination process during variable display shown in FIG. If the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, the pattern at 103SGS301 The part that determines the execution of reach notice (low) based on PT-8 with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4, etc. / Production control CPU 120, reach notice Part that determines the execution of production based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of (high) > setting suggestion (high) > reach notice (low) > setting suggestion (low) (Modification 1 8-20))). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance from being inappropriate due to execution of a predetermined performance in a specific manner when the control is performed in an advantageous state.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of means 7 to 11 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-131277, a suggestive effect suggesting that control is performed in an advantageous state, and a suggestive effect is executed before the suggestive effect is executed. There was one that was configured to be executable with a preparatory performance that foretells that. However, in such a gaming machine, there is a risk that the interest may be reduced by executing another effect during the execution of the effect that raises the expectation. There is a demand for the provision of a gaming machine that can maintain the

(Means 7) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a suggestive effect (for example, a hold display notice effect or a timer effect) that suggests that it will be controlled to the advantageous state , chance first notice effect, etc.), and a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) ), and the suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect) and a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect. , and a third suggesting effect (for example, a chance forewarning effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, and the preparation effect is a first preparation for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed. Including an effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed, and a third suggestion effect, a first preparation effect, and The second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 11-11 (A1) and (A2)), and when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed, Also, when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed, the third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed (for example, see FIGS. 11-10).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(Means 8) In means 7, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed in different periods (for example, timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 11-7(D)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(Means 9) In means 7 or 8, the first suggestive effect is a plurality of types of effect modes (eg, first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode (red), etc.). (see FIG. 11-3 (A)), and the first preparation effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (large effect), etc.). (see FIG. 11-3 (B)), and the executable mode of the first suggestive effect differs depending on which mode of the first preparation effect is executed ( For example, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the pending display advance notice effect is executed in one of the first to third effect modes, and the pending display advance notice preparation of the second effect mode is executed. Alternatively, when the effect is executed, the pending display forewarning effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(Means 10) In any one of means 7 to 9, the suggestion effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect (for example, when it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect or timer effect In some cases, it may be determined that the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect are not executed. Depending, the ease of execution differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3, when the result of determination at the time of winning is a big hit, it is likely to be decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. , as shown in Figure 11-4, it is easy to decide to execute the timer effect as well.However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect.Then, the pending display notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed. timer effect is more likely to be executed when the reserved display advance notice preparation effect is not executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(Means 11) In any one of means 7 to 10, depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed, the ratio of which suggestive effect of the effect mode is executed is different (for example, the pending display notice When the performance mode of the performance and the timer preparation performance is determined as the second performance mode, compared with the case where the first performance mode is determined, the ratio of deciding to execute the reservation display advance notice preparation performance and the timer preparation performance is higher. (See FIGS. 11-3(B) and 11-4(B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for determining effects during variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect type during variable display; (A) is a diagram showing an effect (prediction of reach) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. FIG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of effects during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (low) presentation mode based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (high) presentation mode based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as Modified Example 1, and (B) is a diagram showing determination ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion when using effect type determination table C. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as a second embodiment, and (B) is a view showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at set values 1 and 6 with the fluctuation pattern normal reach, (B) is set with the fluctuation pattern super reach It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the setting value is 1 and setting value 6 in Example 3, and (B) is a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 in super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Example 4; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as a fourth embodiment; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 with the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach in Example 4, (B) shows the fluctuation pattern A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with super reach It is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of variable display effect type determination in the first period; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Modified Example 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 common to all variation patterns in modification 2, (B) is a variation pattern normal reach / super reach A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 in common, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach, setting values 1 and 6 at setting values 1 and 6 It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in 3 periods. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a chance up production|presentation setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a chance up production|presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a chance up production|presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a chance up production|presentation determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining display timings of a chance-up image and a win/fail result notification during execution of Super Reach; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect patterns of the big hit suggestive effects and setting suggestive effects to be executed as the suggestive effects during the rear variable display. be. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the front variable display suggesting performance when execution of the big hit suggesting performance is determined, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution of the set suggesting performance is determined. (C) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during variable front display in the case, and (C) is a diagram showing effect patterns of character effects and timer effects executed as suggestive effects during variable front display, (D) is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit of the character effect and the timer effect and the degree of execution expectation of the setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice effect determination table and a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table and a timer advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice execution processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timings of a pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and a timer effect (preparation effect); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect; It is a flow chart which shows an example of a chance notice setting process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the chance eye advance notice effect;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the present embodiment, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Next, the gaming machine according to Example 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-19.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 103SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 103SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 103SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 103SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also.

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052, is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 103SG201.

Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 103SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the store clerk possessing the setting key. The lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be shared by one key.

A display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 103SG201. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 103SG201. In other words, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 103SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 103SG025A, a second pending display device 103SG025B capable of displaying the second pending memory number, a normal symbol display device 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbols, a normal pattern pending display device 103SG025C capable of displaying the normal pattern pending memory number, A round display 103SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display section 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 103SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 103SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A uses two types of big win symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 103SG025A and the second suspension display 103SG025B each have 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 103SG025A and second pending display 103SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the section 103SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 103SG025A is lit, and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 103SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 103SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321, and the second movable body 103SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. An origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 103SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation. Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, super reach β, super reach α, since it is set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit becomes higher in the order of the variable display result "big hit", the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, a form in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern is exemplified. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may differ depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern will be normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous performance three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variation patterns of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special design) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special design) shown in Fig. 8-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 8-7(A) and 8-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". Further, when the gaming state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characterizing section 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In this embodiment, a total of six set values, 1 to 6, are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figure 8-8 (A) and Figure 8-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and the jackpot game. A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the state shifts to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as the big hit B. In other words, the fact that the decision ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not decided (the decision ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

Further, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the jackpot probability, the easier it is for the jackpot C to be determined as the jackpot type). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area A switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot. A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), if the setting value is "1", 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 is super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "2", 1 to 380 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "3", 1 to 360 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", 1 to 340 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "5", 1 to 320 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the setting value is "1", , 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 180 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 160 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "4", 1 to 140 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", 1 to 120 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 100 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

Thus, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of the jackpot is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", and the type of jackpot is "jackpot A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, a "jackpot B" or a "jackpot C" may occur. can raise the expectations of

In addition, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997 Among them, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), if the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 481 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 460 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for the number of total pending storage in the low base of 5 or more), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation pattern of deviation (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the variation pattern determination table D (high base medium) for deviation, when the set value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Each is assigned to a variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are completely the same between each set value as the variation pattern for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, super reach α Regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is set, may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value is the same. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, a form in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach differs according to the set value is exemplified. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the super reach loss variation The random number ranges assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the ratio of the variable display to be executed in the variation pattern of super reach out in accordance with the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display is super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. may be executed with a variation pattern of

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display section 103SG029A, a second display section 103SG029B, a third display section 103SG029C, and a fourth display section 103SG029D. Each of the first display portion 103SG029A to the fifth display portion 103SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 103SG029A to fifth display section 103SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 103SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability/low-probability base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low-probability base state) for every 3rd out (low-probability/low-probability base state) in all game states. Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 103SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A, and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (103SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010). move on.

At 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 103SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (103SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (103SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (103SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is specified. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (103SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 103SG029 is ended.

If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF at 103SGSa011 (103SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the processes of 103SGSa013a to 103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 103SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 103SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) without executing, go to 103SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as indicated by 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017 to 103SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), proceed to 103SGSa022; (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

In addition, at 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened, the lock switch 103SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (103SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the processes 103SGSa009 to 103SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

Further, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (103SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (103SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (103SGSa026; N), the processing of 103SGSa025 and 103SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 103SG029 stops blinking (103SGSa027) and proceeds to 103SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 103SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (103SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (103SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, at 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later, etc., to the effect control board 12. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (103SGSa034; N), the processing of 103SGSa033 and 103SGSa034 is repeatedly executed. 103SG029A, second display unit 103SG029B, third display unit 103SG029C, and fourth display unit 103SG029D constituting the display monitor 103SG029 as a notification (error notification) of recovery from a power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (103SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 103SGSa032 to 103SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 103SG029. , the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are notified of the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON at 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined at 103SGSa014 that the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014 ;Y).

8-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 103SG194A Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set at 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning, 1 buffer number It shifts up by minutes (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets 3 symbols as even numbers as the stop symbols. A combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" as the stop pattern. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determining process during variable display shown in FIG. 8-15, and determines whether or not to execute the effect during variable display in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Effect during variable display)
The effect during the variable display includes, as a result of effect, an advantageous state suggestion result that suggests control to the jackpot game state, a setting suggestion result that suggests the setting of the set value performed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process, It is an effect (predetermined effect) that can be either. In this characteristic part 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a ready-to-win notice (announcement effect) that suggests the possibility of a big hit with the variable display mode becoming a reach as an effect in which the result of the effect is the result of suggesting an advantageous state. be. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 6 the setting value is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in which both the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion can be executed when the effect result can be either the advantageous state suggesting result or the setting suggesting result. When it is possible, it is possible to execute the ready-to-reach notice in which the performance result is the advantageous state suggestion result, prior to the setting suggestion in which the performance result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, the effect during variable display has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9. When the execution is determined, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the basis of which the variable display effect is to be executed, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the effect mode. It is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variable display of the pattern (timing before the variable display mode becomes ready-to-win). Then, a plurality of (e.g., eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger is riding fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The effect during variable display ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. In addition, while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side, an image Z2 may be displayed showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies will break and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies will break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies will break and fall. , In the case of the pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and dropped.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (B) and 8-19 (A), patterns PT-1 to PT-8 all have the same timing at which the paraglider is destroyed, and each pattern PT-1 to A number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number of them may be fine). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19(B), pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like pattern PT-8. 8 is different. Specifically, 7 paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining 1 body is destroyed at the 2nd timing after the 1st timing when the other 7 bodies are destroyed. .

The production period of such a variable display production is executed based on which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, that is, the ready-to-reach notice in which the production result is an advantageous state suggestion result or the production result is a set suggestion result Regardless of which of the setting suggestions is to become and a non-common mode effect that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and a non-common effect period during which the effect of moving downward in the display area of No. 5) is executed.

In addition, in the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as an effect during the variable display, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, but the decorative patterns are displayed in a smaller size than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. Also, during the execution period of the effect during variable display, another notice effect or the like different from the effect during variable display may be executed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. For patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are specific patterns (specific modes) corresponding to the setting suggestion that suggests which one of ~ 6, and the number of paragliders destroyed is 8, It is a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to a reach notice that suggests the possibility of reach. In other words, during the variable display effect, the effect mode in the common effect period is the same, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (the number of paragliders to be destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders are displayed. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest the possibility that the set values are odd numbers (eg, 1, 3, 5), and patterns PT-2 and PT-4 suggest that the set values are even numbers. (eg, 2, 4, 6). 6 suggests that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (e.g., 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (e.g., 6). .

Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of set values 5 and 6 (high setting) is determined. The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low expectation that the The second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high);

In this characteristic portion 103SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 to 3 may be low and the setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

On the other hand, pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the pattern may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and pattern PT-9 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the pattern will be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding pattern PT-8, the first special pattern with low expectation of super reach by being determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the pattern is normal reach {reach notice (low), first specific mode}, and for pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach advance notice (high), second special mode}.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 is a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests control to the jackpot game state and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-9) that suggests settings. 1 to PT-7), a variable display effect can be executed based on one of a plurality of types of effect modes including pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of special mode) When setting suggestions (predetermined effects of specific aspects) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can all be executed, ready-to-win announcements can be executed with priority over setting suggestions.

In the first embodiment, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 are determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Since the variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a loser than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 is a super reach, that is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is the pattern. While it is a lower pattern than PT-9, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is a loss, so the pattern PT-9 is , Super Reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation for a big hit than the pattern PT-8.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, in the effect during the variable display, the number of paragliders destroyed indicates the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set. It is not limited to this, and a big hit or high setting may be suggested by the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and to suggest which set value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of appearances of characters, the type of characters that appear, etc. It may also be possible to suggest a big hit or a set value by means of.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the numbers corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or illuminating the game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that a big hit or a pattern with a high degree of expectation is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, in the process of determining effects during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies a variable display result and a variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (loss, non-probability variable big win A, probability variable big win B, probability variable big win C, small win) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the . In addition, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, while extracting the random number for determining the reach notice type, using the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. A lottery is held to determine the type of reach advance notice in the case where the game is to be played (103SGS292).

8-17 (A) in the effect (reach notice) type determination table A, when the variation pattern is super reach, 20 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 to pattern PT-8 , and 60 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-9. In other words, when the variation pattern is super reach, PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than super reach.

When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. there is In other words, when the variation pattern is normal reach, PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than normal reach.

Also, when the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, if the variation pattern is normal reach, the pattern PT-8 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is normal reach, and if the variation pattern is super reach, Pattern PT-9 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than in cases other than super reach fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, if the production based on the pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach fluctuation pattern than the super reach fluctuation pattern, and if the production based on the pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is highly likely that it is a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, the pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and the pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is a pattern of reach notice (high) with high expectations for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of lottery for the presence or absence and type of reach notice execution in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). If it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294), Go to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that pattern PT-9 is not won in 103SGS292, that is, if reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 is won, reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) } is won, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS295). Next, while extracting the setting suggestion type determination random number, using the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the setting value specified in 103SGS295, whether or not setting suggestion is executed in the effect during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 8-17(B), when the setting value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1. , 10 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 25 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-4, and pattern Four decision values are assigned to PT-5, one decision value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one decision value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number of 1 or 3, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. If the set value is an even number 2 or 4, patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and if the set value is 5 , pattern PT-5 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, pattern PT-6 wins at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's getting easier. In addition, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, the set value of 6 is confirmed when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if the effects based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 where the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less, there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider will be destroyed. If an effect based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number of characters displayed is 5 or more is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the set value is either 5 or 6. In other words, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are set as setting suggestion (low) with low possibility of high setting (setting value 5 or 6), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are high setting (setting value 5 or 6) is set as a setting suggestion (high) with a high possibility.

In the first embodiment, the random number for determining the reach announcement type and the random number for determining the setting suggestion type are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of determination values of each determination random number is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number may be determined as appropriate. Just do it. In addition, each determination random number counter for generating these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in random number update processing.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120, as a result of performing a lottery for the presence or absence of the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} A decision is made as to whether or not the prize has been won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been elected, if the non-execution of the reach announcement is elected in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on is uniquely determined, and when the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298), and proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won , Based on the non-execution of the setting suggestion or the winning of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at 103SGS297, it is determined whether the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is winning at 103SGS293 (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was won in 103SGS300, when non-execution of setting suggestion is won in 103SGS297, execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is elected in 103SGS297, reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 Execution is determined (103SGS301) over setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 through PT-4 and proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is not won in 103SGS300, it is determined whether any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is selected (103SGS302), execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Also, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 have been won, that is, if the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without determining the execution of the variable display effect. Terminate the effect determination process.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any one of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 8-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution determination flag is set at 103SGS278, that is, whether or not the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277 is performed. In the process, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display of any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined.

When the variable display effect execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, sets the period until the start of the variable display effect start waiting timer for variable display effect start (103SGS279), and executes the variable display effect effect. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and go to 103SGS281. On the other hand, when the effect execution determination flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the effect during variable display, in this characteristic part 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the effect during variable display. Since the effect during variable display is specified based on and is set to start the effect during variable display, the period until the start timing of effect during variable display is set to the timer for waiting to start the effect during variable display. The present invention is not limited to this. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the effect during variable display is started may be set in the variable display effect start waiting timer.

At 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the production control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decoration pattern by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one to one, but the production control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (103SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (103SGS286).

Thus, in the present embodiment 1, the effect control CPU 120, when executing the variable display of the symbols based on the reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display, before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode At performance timing, it is possible to execute either a reach notice or a setting suggestion as a performance during variable display, and when determining whether or not to execute the performance during variable display, the reach notice becomes an advantageous state suggestion result as a performance result. It is possible to execute the (special mode effect) with priority over the setting suggestion (specific mode effect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display in FIG. take precedence over

That is, the effect control CPU120, in the lottery of the reach notice, if the variation pattern is super reach, to determine the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294), reach Notice (high) is executed at a higher rate (preferred) than setting suggestion. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is 60%. , even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296 based on the reach notice (low) winning, setting suggestion based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at 103SGS297 (high ) is not won, 103SGS301 will determine the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion (priority). Become.

In addition, the reach notice includes reach notice (low) and reach notice (high) that suggests that the ratio of control to a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT -9 and the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, the reach prediction (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is set to the pattern PT- 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest caused by the effect during the variable display due to the excessive priority given to the advance notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

In addition, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) that suggests that the setting suggestion (low) is likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low). -When both setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 can be executed, the pattern PT-8 Predictive reach (low) based on 103SGS301 can be executed in preference to setting suggestions (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the effect during the variable display due to excessive priority given to the setting suggestion and the restriction on the execution of the ready-to-win announcement.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For more information, Reach Warning High precedes Setting Suggestion High, Setting Reach Warning High precedes Reach Warning Low, and Reach Warning Low precedes Setting Suggestion ( low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "prediction of reach (high)>suggestion of setting (high)>prediction of reach (low)>suggestion of setting (low)".

In this characteristic part 103SG, it is sufficient that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the effect during variable display is a effect executed during the variable display period of the pattern, and the ready-to-reach notice suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least It suggests which set value is not changed during the operating period. In addition, it is not preferable for the game arcade that setting suggestions are frequently made and the player can easily guess what the set value is. Therefore, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the variable display effect is executed when the set value is high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either, but the set value is also suggested at another timing. However, since the suggestion of a big win can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the ready-to-win notice appears at a higher rate than the set suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display production is a production that is executed only during the variable display period of the pattern based on the super reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation for big hits than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is a reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win is higher than in the case where the reach is not achieved. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, particularly in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease, and the production will become inappropriate. It is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming inappropriate by executing the notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, as a tendency of the effect during variable display, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and a high In some circumstances, such as setting, the execution ratio may be set such that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach announcement.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is preferentially executed (before) the lottery for the setting suggestion. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution ratio of the ready-to-win announcement becomes higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the setting suggestion lottery may be performed prior to the ready-to-reach announcement lottery. , the order is arbitrary. In addition, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, It is not limited to what is described.

Incidentally, in the first embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a mode is exemplified in which the setting suggestion suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be executed, but the present invention is described. is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has changed since the pachinko game machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display of the symbol was started (variable display mode is the timing before reaching reach)), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can be executed in FIG. 8- 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the ready-to-win announcement lottery, the execution of the ready-to-win announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions in 103SGS294. Even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, 103SGS301 Reach notice (low ) is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4./Production control CPU 120, reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > Reach notice (low) > Setting suggestion (low) The part that determines the execution of the production based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 (see Figure 8-20 of modification 1))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance from being inappropriate due to the execution of the predetermined performance in the specific mode when the control is performed in the advantageous state.
Specifically, even if the variable display result is a big hit, setting suggestions that can be suggested even at timings other than the variable display are prioritized over the reach notice. , the player's expectation for the big win cannot be suitably increased, and the performance can be prevented from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., reach notice (low)) and a second special mode (e.g., reach notice (high)) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, , When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. high) is determined prior to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special mode. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to excessive restriction on the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high )) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, , If any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. -Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific mode. (For example, if the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the lottery for the reach notice in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode being excessively restricted.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Action prompt notification means capable of executing action prompt notification prompting the player to perform an action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation prompt effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. executable part.) and
Action detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific action (for example, action of operating push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the action promotion notification by the action promotion notification means is being executed. and,
with
The predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific action by the action detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can press the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific action to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can execute an effect to change to the image Z2 (destroy the paraglider and make it fall).Modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a player who knows the specific action can execute the predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined effect is a common effect period during which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed (for example, either a reach notice or a setting suggestion) A common effect period during which an effect is executed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area regardless of whether there is a common effect period) and the predetermined special mode. A non-common effect period that can specify whether it is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 according to the effect pattern is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 8-18)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by having the common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player as to whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode will be executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect of a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state and also suggests settings (for example, it is possible to execute both the reach notice and the setting suggestion). Sometimes, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) is displayed (for example, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, an image of a moving paraglider with a character appearing, etc.) is displayed. parts, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the ready-to-reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) are executable means, for example, the suggestion about the display result of one variable display. Any timing may be used as long as it is the timing at which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the pending memory If the display result is suggested, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is executed and during the execution period of the variable display. . In addition, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

In addition, when both reach notice (predetermined effect of special mode) and setting suggestion (predetermined effect of specific mode) can be executed, reach notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion. The lottery is executed with priority over the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is preceded by the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 and executing reach announcements based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It should be noted that executing the reach notice at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes executing the reach notice at a rate of 100% and not executing the setting suggestion, that is, the reach notice execution ratio is 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of destroyed paragliders suggests the possibility of a big hit or a set value, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executable. As an example, the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executed when they can be executed. Both the advantageous state suggesting result and the setting suggesting result may be included as the effect during variable display.

That is, in the first embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common common effect period between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the reach notice and the setting suggestion have different production modes (the common effect period It does not have a corresponding period) may be a separate production (specifically, the reach announcement is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-20. 8-20, (A) is a flow chart showing the processing for determining effects during variable display as Modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing execution ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the presence or absence of the execution of the reach notice and the type of the reach notice is performed with priority over the presence or absence of the execution of the setting suggestion and the lottery of the type, so that the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and lottery for ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20(A), in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, a random number for determining the effect type is extracted, and whether or not the effect during variable display (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) is executed using a table C (not shown) for determining the type of effect (notice of reach/suggestion of setting), A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach advance notice or setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS312).

Although not shown, the effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) type determination table C (not shown) sets the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 according to the type of variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, the determination ratio of the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 varies depending on the type of variation pattern and the setting values 1 to 6, but the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion shown in FIG. 8-20 (B) As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (prioritized) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. (eg, 50% reach notice, 40% setting suggestion, and 10% non-execution are determined).

Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, reach notice (high) is higher than reach notice (low) (for example, reach notice (high) 40%, reach notice (low) 10%) is preferably determined by Also, if the setting values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) to setting suggestion (low) is higher than setting suggestion (high) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35%, setting suggestion (low) is 5 %). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 is the ratio of reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > reach notice (low) > setting suggestion (low) of the effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 Decide to execute.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion is exemplified based on the variation pattern and setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, Depending on the variation pattern, the set value, and the result of the variable display, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different. In detail, regardless of whether the variation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach variation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion at a higher rate than when the loss occurs. is preferred.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the ready-to-reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, the effect result of the effect during variable display is It is also possible to make it possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As the specific effect, for example, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, the character (e.g. displaying an image of a moving paraglider in which appears), or displaying images in which the display mode of the paraglider (e.g., color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode may be displayed, the background color may be changed, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or a light emitting body may emit light in a special light emission mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the effect during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be made variable. Each of them may be independently executable at a performance timing different from the presentation during display.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice in a manner different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. On the other hand, setting suggestions in a manner different from the setting suggestions shown in FIGS. It may be executable.

In Example 1 of the characterizing part 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display of , the effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-21(A) as the second embodiment, the first period is between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach effect for the variation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. Effect during variable display can be executed in a second period after the first period.

Since the variable display time for non-reach and small hit variation patterns is too short to execute the effect during variable display twice or more, in the second embodiment, the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach are the targets for execution of the effect during variable display. However, non-reach and small hit variation patterns may be included as targets for execution of effects during variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described effect determination processing during variable display, whether or not to execute effect during variable display is determined according to the variation pattern using the effect execution determination table during variable display shown in FIG. 8-21(B). determined by different percentages. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), when the variation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 variable display effect execution determination random numbers are stored in the variable display effect execution determination table. are assigned to the execution of the effect during variable display, and 60 are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display. Further, when the variation pattern is super reach, 60 of the 100 variable-display effect execution determination random numbers are assigned to the execution of the variable-display effect execution in the variable-display effect execution determination table. are assigned to non-execution of effects during variable display.

In the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the effect during variable display is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 8-21(A).

When the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIGS. Execution of the setting suggestion and the ready-to-reach notice is determined at different ratios between the effect during the variable display and the effect during the variable display executed during the second period. In the same period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution ratio of setting suggestion and ready-to-win notice is set to be the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-23, when the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach, the effect type during variable display (effect PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in pachinko machine 1. , pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation (high)) at a rate of 40%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) was determined, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation) at a rate of 60% (high)).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1% 5 to PT-7 {Suggestion setting (high)}, 35% decided pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the set value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% decided to pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 55% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, when the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 decided to {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 15%, pattern PT-9 {reach notice at a rate of 25% (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the set value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.2% decided to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach The rate (60%) at which the execution of notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach It is set higher than the percentage (40%) at which execution of advance notice (low) or reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice, which is a result of suggesting an advantageous state. It is possible to heighten expectations for a big hit.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) Or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined In the second period, regarding the effect type of the variable display effect executed during the second period, the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. Any one of PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion to set (low) or suggestion to set (high)} is set higher than the determined rate.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 corresponding to the reach announcement are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are determined in the second period. By being determined at a lower rate than the first period in the period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion in the second period. .

For this reason, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the second period, that is, during the variable display As the performance is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice is lowered (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed at the first time, so that the variable display Since the player can predict that there is a high possibility that the variable display will be super reachable before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation for the variable display being super reachable is reduced. It is designed so that it can be suppressed.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect during variable display executed in the second period is more favorable than the effect during variable display executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any one of pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the effect during variable display is executed, the effect during variable display is more likely to be executed in pattern PT-9, so the game for the effect during variable display being executed in pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8. It can sustain people's expectations.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display is executed twice in the first period and the second period. However, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more. In the case where the effect during variable display is executed three or more times in this way, by setting the determination ratio of the effect type so that the pattern PT-9 is likely to be determined each time the effect during variable display is executed, It may be possible to maintain the technician's sense of expectation for a longer period of time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 1 to PT-7 {Suggestion of setting (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined at different rates, so the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during the second period are executed. It is difficult for setting suggestions to be executed continuously during the variable display effect. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during variable display due to execution of setting suggestions in both of these two effects during variable display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} are determined differently, so the variable display effect executed in the first period and the second period are executed It is difficult to continuously execute the reach notice with the effect during variable display. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during the variable display due to execution of the ready-to-win announcement in both of these two effects during the variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. In the case of executing, the form in which the rate of execution of reach notice is different as the effect during variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is controlled in the first period In the case of executing the effect during variable display and the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period, the rate at which the ready-to-win announcement is executed as the effect during variable display may be the same. By doing so, when the effect during the variable display is executed in the first period and the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period and the second period. , the player can be expected in the same way.

In addition, in the present embodiment 2, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, if the advance notice effect during the variable display is executed in the same period Although the rate at which the reach notice is determined to be executed is the same as the effect during variable display, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the notice effect during variable display executed during the same period , the rate at which execution of the ready-to-win notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁By doing so, according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed as the effect during the variable display changes in the first period and the second period, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the middle production from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment 2, as shown in FIGS. Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate of determining the execution of any pattern PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same rate, and the rate of determining the reach notice (pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9 execution ratio) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine. Similarly, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) It is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the ratio that determines the reach notice (the ratio that determines the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set in the pachinko machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, the effect during variable display executed during the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) always Setting suggestions are executed at a rate of 60% and reach notices are executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display effect executed in the second period (second variable display effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the ready-to-win announcement is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be made to expect the execution of the setting suggestion in the same way.

In addition, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, there are more opportunities to provide reach notices and setting suggestions in one variable display, which improves interest. .

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than during the variable display (for example, the ending of the jackpot game state or the variable display However, when the player is playing the game, it is during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention. Therefore, in the effect during variable display in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, it is possible not only to execute the setting suggestion during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention to, but also as in the second embodiment. As described above, by enabling the effect during variable display to be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to not only increase the chances of executing the setting suggestion, but also to increase the chances of executing the setting suggestions. If it is executed at a rate higher than , it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the ready-to-win announcement in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the ready-to-win announcement even in the variation pattern of the big win.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and non-execution of neither reach announcement nor setting suggestion may be determined in at least one of the first period and the second period.

In the case where non-execution can be determined in this way, even if the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the reach announcement must be different between the first period and the second period. can let Further, even if the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be the same between the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 can be executed),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as a second embodiment, As shown, during variable display of normal reach or super reach, the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 The reach based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is better in the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period than in the case of executing the effect during variable display. The part where the notice is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, in the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is more likely to be executed than in the effect during variable display executed in the first period. It is possible to heighten expectations for being controlled to the big win game state during the second period, which is closer to the end timing of the variable display than the first period.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode at a rate lower than the rate of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during variable display in the first period in the second period after the first period. A part that executes a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns, at a lower rate when executing a variable display effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation for an advantageous state by making it easier to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, even if non-execution of the variable display effect cannot be determined, it is possible to determine the ready-to-win notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means is
When executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as a second embodiment Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is changed to the special pattern PT- 8 or the part that runs at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is changed to the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to The part that runs at a higher rate than suggested by any of the PT-7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, while the predetermined effect of the specific mode is less likely to be executed. It is possible to suitably increase the sense of expectation.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect multiple times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can perform The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, a mode is exemplified in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the ready-to-win effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect during variable display may be executed even during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern by executing the effect processing during variable display),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Third Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect during variable display),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode for suggesting settings (for example, setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4), and settings and types suggested by the first suggestion mode. A second suggestion mode (for example, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions regarding different settings of
When the predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing both the predetermined effect of the first suggested mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggested mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as the second embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in 8-21, during variable display of normal reach and super reach), when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times among the plurality of times, the predetermined effect is executed later than the first number of times among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode can be executed at a higher rate (for example, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26 and FIGS. As shown in -31, when the production control CPU 120 can execute the production during variable display in the first period and the second period during the variable display of normal reach or super reach as the second or third embodiment, The part where the setting suggestion (strong) is executed at a higher rate when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period than when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined performance is repeatedly executed, the execution of the predetermined performance of the second suggestive mode becomes easier, so that the player's expectation for the execution of the predetermined performance of the second suggestive mode is maintained. can be done.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, in the effect during variable display executed during the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) is made more than the effect during variable display executed during the first period. is easily executed, it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the high set value such as 4 to 6 set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests the odd number setting or the even number setting, and the first suggestion The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode that makes a suggestion about a setting different in type from the setting suggested by the mode, is a mode that suggests an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The set value suggested by the mode and the set value suggested by the second suggestion mode may all be different set values (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the set value 1 and the second suggestion mode suggests the set value 1). If the value 6 is suggested, or if the first suggestion mode suggests odd settings 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even settings 2, 4, 6, etc.), the first suggestion mode suggests Both the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode and the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode may include a common setting value (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests setting values 1 to 4, and the second suggestion mode is When suggesting set values 3 to 6 above the middle), even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion regarding a setting change, and the other is a suggestion regarding a setting value that has been set. good. In other words, not only when the set values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also when there are a plurality of set values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode, the settings to be suggested Including those with different numbers and ranges of values, and those with different suggested contents.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means specifies when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, including the first suggestive mode and the second suggestive mode. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period. Portion where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same rate in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be similarly expected.
Specifically, after setting the execution ratio of all setting suggestions to be the same in the first period and the second period (or a lower ratio in the second period than in the first period), the effect during variable display in the first period By executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing , avoiding excessive setting suggestions At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on a special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a rate higher than the rate of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode in the first number of times (e.g., Embodiment 2 As shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period rather than executing the effect during variable display in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the ratio of execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to one game result.
Note that, in the second embodiment, if the execution ratio of all setting suggestions is the same between the first period and the second period, setting suggestions (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, it is possible to execute the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform reach notice and setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, when displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player for execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Fourth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. part),
When executing the predetermined effect in a first number of times out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect in a second number of times after the first number of times out of a plurality of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and after the first period. The part where the ratio of executing the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 differs between the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period of )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the probability of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display at a higher rate than the execution of the ready-to-win notice in the first period, while in the second period , by determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during the variable display at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, Since the ready-to-win notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced. In addition, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions may be determined at a lower rate than the reach notice execution, while in the second period, the setting suggestions may be decided at a higher rate than the reach notice execution. .

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period, pattern PT-8. Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
In addition, in the second embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the ready-to-reach notice can be made the same while the setting suggestion execution ratio is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-22 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the production)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, in the first period, while determining the execution of the setting suggestion at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, in the second period, by determining the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate lower than the execution of the reach notice In the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but it is also easy to execute the ready-to-win notice, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display in the period, regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the effect control CPU 120 Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate regardless of the set value when executing the effect during variable display in the second period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. part),
When the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, a plurality of times. Among them, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the same rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, and the effect during the variable display executed in the second period is set regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes suggestions at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first set value or the second set value is set, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times does not change, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode does not change. You can expect the same.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, regardless of whether any value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is executed in the first period. The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display and the ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display that is executed in the second period do not change, that is, the set value is Since the situation of setting suggestions is the same regardless of whether the low setting value or the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value depending on the appearance situation of the setting suggestions.

In the second embodiment, even if any value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display executed in the first period. Although the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display executed in the second period does not change from the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestions are executed during the second period is exemplified, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a ratio (appearance situation) at which a setting suggestion is executed as a variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of a plurality of setting values 1 to 6; If the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display executed in the second period is the same, setting values other than the two setting values (for example, 3 to 6) are set in the second period. The rate at which setting suggestions are executed (appearance situation) may not be the same between the first period and the second period.

Further, the setting values 1 to 6 are set in the pachinko game machine 1 only in one of the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period. Regardless of which value is set, the ratio (appearance situation) of setting suggestion as a variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestions are executed may be the same.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period) , the part that executes the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effects of the mode at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the first period and the The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is executed at a different rate in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, variable Regarding the effect during display, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the effect during variable display executed during the second period is set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes the reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set In the case where the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 at a different rate according to the setting value and the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period, it is set Part that executes reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any period other than the above can be set as long as it is a period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display until the variable display result is displayed. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of Normal Reach, the second period is from the start to the end of Super Reach, or the first period is from the start of Normal Reach or Super Reach, and the second period is Normal Reach. Or until the end of the super reach, the variation pattern temporarily stops the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then restarts the variable display, so that one variable display is simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like variable display, the first period is the start timing of the first re-variable display, and the second period is the start timing of the second re-variable display. , may correspond to the re-variable display period.

In the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and if the effect during variable display is the same number of times, reach regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The form which determines execution of an advance notice and execution of a setting suggestion in the same ratio was illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. In the case of making it possible to execute times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the same number of variable display performances are performed. You may

It should be noted that, when the execution of the effect during variable display is determined, as shown in FIGS. Execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at the same ratio with the effect during the variable display executed in .

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed is determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. -8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 63% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 2%. decided on pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35% advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 35%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 1.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 40%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 45% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 47% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 3%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 3.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. 4. Effect types (effect patterns) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period are determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {suggestion of setting (low)} at a rate of 41.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 50%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 55% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31, when paying attention to the case where the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 17.5%, pattern PT at a rate of 17.5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 30% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {Suggestion of setting (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 20% The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. , Pattern PT5 ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 1.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 22.5% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 2.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 40 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 2% determined to be one of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 25% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%; 5% decided to pattern PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 45% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 3.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 27.5% At a rate of 27.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 27.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 50 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, 5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, during the first period Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of set value (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the second period, and the variable display executed in the second period. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type of the medium effect is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the same manner is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the ready-to-win announcement is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second set value. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of setting value (low) or suggestion of setting value (high)} are determined as the effect type is different when the setting value (for example, setting value 6) is set. , 1st set value or 2nd set value, the appearance state of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period is changed, so that the performance during the variable display can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period, a pattern is used as the effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. The ratio of PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is reduced, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( high)} is determined. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with high setting values (for example, 5, 6), the setting suggestions are higher than when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with low setting values (for example, 1 to 4). is difficult to execute, it is difficult for a player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment as well, the pattern PT-9 is used as the effect type for the during-variable-display effect executed in the second period rather than the during-variable-display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined is set high. In other words, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice based on the pattern PT-9, so that the player's expectation for the effect during the variable display being executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. can be made

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-27, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, during the variable display executed in the first period The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined is the same between the effect and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, Pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined in the same form, but the present invention is not limited to this. , even if the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {Set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be different, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} may be determined differently.

In the third embodiment, the effects during variable display are the same when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion is exemplified by the ratio, the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion may be executed at a different rate as the effect during the variable display depending on whether the effect during the variable display is executed. By doing so, the ratio (appearance rate) at which setting suggestions are executed changes between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-27, the effect during variable display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) and the variable display performed during the second period When the ready-to-win notice is executed as a middle effect (second variable display-in-time effect), an example is shown in which the ready-to-win notice is executed at a different rate according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the reach notice is executed as (second variable display effect), the reach notice is given at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 if the same number of variable display effect is performed. may be executed. By doing so, if the performance during the variable display is the same number of times, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed (appearance situation) does not change according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. , the player can be made to expect the execution of the ready-to-win notice without change between the performance during variable display executed in the first period and the performance during variable display executed in the second period.

(Sixth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following sixth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion that can execute the effect during variable display in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect),
When executing the predetermined effect in a first number of times out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect in a second number of times after the first number of times out of a plurality of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed. It can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and The part where the setting suggestions are executed at the same rate as in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be similarly expected.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-27, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIG. 8-27) as the medium production, the variable display medium production executed in the first period and the variable display medium production executed in the second period are set. Players can similarly expect suggestions to be implemented.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, A pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period is a special pattern rather than the effect during the variable display in the first period. The part that executes a high percentage of reach announcements based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
In addition, in the third embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the ready-to-reach announcement can be made different between the first period and the second period while making the execution ratio of the setting suggestion the same.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, Regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the case where the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period , regardless of the set value, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second period Part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Seventh invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following seventh invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion where the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect),
When the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, a plurality of times. Among them, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a different rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. If executed, the part that can execute setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 at different rates according to the set values)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on whether the first set value or the second set value is set, the state of appearance of the predetermined performance of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes, so that the predetermined performance can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. .
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-31, depending on which of 1 to 6 the value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period. Since the setting suggestion execution ratio (appearance situation) changes between when the middle effect is executed and when the variable display during effect is executed in the second period, the player can obtain not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the setting value according to the appearance situation of the setting suggestion in .

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the first period and the second The part that can execute the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate as the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, Part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, Regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the case where the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period , regardless of the set value, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second period Part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In Example 2 and Example 3 of the characterizing part 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display. and the second period each based on the fluctuation pattern and the setting value to determine which one of the reach notice and setting suggestion is to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for the first period determines whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, reach notice and setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and set value It may be determined which one is to be executed, that is, whether the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period is to be executed based on different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as a fourth embodiment, the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach are targeted, and the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach. A performance during variable display can be executed in a second period after one period. It should be noted that the non-reach and small hit variation patterns require a short variable display time to execute the effect during variable display two or more times. is limited to

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, if the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period, For the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the variation pattern. 8-33, the processing for determining effect during variable display in the fourth embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 8-33, in the process of determining effects during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies a variation pattern (103SGS311). The variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. Next, determine whether the specified variation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), proceed to 103SG313 in the case of normal reach or super reach, and if other than normal reach or super reach, that is, non-reach or small hit variation pattern In this case, since it is not subject to the effect during variable display, the process for determining the effect during variable display is terminated.

In 103SGS312, when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the setting value specified in 103SGS313, whether or not to execute the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined in a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown) ( common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), in 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display effect execution determination table common to normal reach or super reach, and uses reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on either Specifically, when the set value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, determines setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and non-execution at a rate of 10%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, execution of reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set It is set so that the larger the value, the higher the setting suggestion execution ratio and the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-35, focusing on the determination ratio of the effect type during variable display in the first period, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed at the rate of 20% is decided to be non-execution, and the ratio of 39% is decided to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}. Then, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} are determined at a rate of 1%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

40. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 18%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.2%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

43. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 15%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.5%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 12.5%, Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 45.5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

46. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 10%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 3.5%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 40% to determine the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, in 103SGS314, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the first period has been determined (103SGS315). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and an effect execution determination flag during variable display indicating that execution of the effect during variable display in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317), Go to 103SGS318. If execution is not determined at 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is determined, the process proceeds to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is the normal reach (103SGS318), and when it is determined as the normal reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, the second Whether or not to execute the effect during variable display during the period and the type of effect (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined using a not shown effect execution determination table during variable display (for normal reach) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 8-34(B), at 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 uses the variable display effect execution determination table for normal reach to determine any one of reach advance notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, in the case of the set value 1, determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and does not execute at a rate of 5%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-36, focusing on the case of normal reach for the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 determines that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion ( Decided to pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, At a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 3%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

30. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Pattern PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 6%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the variation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, the super reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, whether or not to execute the effect during the variable display in the second period, and the execution The type of effect (effect pattern) to be used is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 8-34(C), at 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach, and determines any of reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution. . Specifically, in the case of the set value 1 and the set value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute do not decide Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-36, focusing on the case of super ready-to-win with respect to the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In the case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined at a rate of 36% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and 4% Decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {at a rate of 55% reach notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 4.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)} decided, 5% of the pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined, 5% of the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 33.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 6.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)} decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 8%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 5% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 to PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and a variable display effect execution determination flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323 ), ending the effect during variable display. If execution is not determined in 103SGS321, that is, if non-execution is determined, the effect during variable display is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the set value is 1 to 6, and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, it is determined whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Determine reach warnings or setting suggestions based on separate decision tables. That is, since the criteria for determining which of the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion are to be executed are different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the production during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the first period, while the reach announcement is made in the second period Since it is easier to execute, setting suggestions will not be likely to be executed in both the first period and the second period, even though it will be normal reach or super reach in the second period, and Since the reach advance notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution ratio of the reach notice in the first period, the reach notice is executed in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to suppress the middle production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 to 8-37, focusing on each setting value, when executing the effect during variable display in the first period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 Execution of the reach notice is determined at the same ratio (40%), and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. It is determined by the same ratio (60%). For this reason, regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, in the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, The player's attention can be drawn in the same way.

Also, even if the setting value is high (for example, setting value 5, 6, etc.), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion in the second period, but the super reach In this case, since the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the big win from being lowered.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than the case where the setting suggestion is decided in the first period, so the setting suggestion in the super reach is executed, the player's expectations for the high setting can be heightened.

In addition, in the first period, when the setting value is 1, execution of the reach notice and setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the setting value is 6, that is, when the setting values are 1, 2, The higher the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestions than the reach notice. easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display (first effect during variable display) in the first period and in the second period. Although the execution of the ready-to-reach notice is determined at a different rate between when the effect during variable display (the effect during variable display for the second time) is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution of the ready-to-win notice at the same ratio between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the ready-to-win announcement in the same manner in the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect.

Further, in the present embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 8-34, if the same number of variable display effects are performed, the ready-to-win notice is executed at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Although the mode of determination is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the effect during the variable display of the same number of times, execution of the reach notice according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be determined in different proportions. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the execution of the same effect type in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect is monotonous. can be prevented from becoming

(8th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following eighth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit" in the variable pattern setting process of S111). A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not);
Variable display means capable of executing variable display according to the determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect process during variable display, displays the decorative pattern based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. the part that performs variable display) and
Predetermined effect determination means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes of a predetermined effect (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, patterns PT-1 to PT-9 are selected as the effect pattern of the variable display effect. the part that determines one from
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as effect during variable display Setting suggestion, or part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
with
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as a fourth embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. ),
Based on at least the set value that has been set, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-33 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control A part where the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value that is set in the variable display effect in the first period),
Based on at least the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times is determined (for example, in the embodiment As shown in FIG. 8-33 as 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the effect during variable display based on the set value and the variation pattern set in the effect during variable display in the second period. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-33, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display in the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time), the effect during variable display is determined based on the variation pattern of the variable display. Determines the effect type of the effect * Isn't it a set value? (See 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display in the second period (second effect during variable display), the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko game machine 1 Based on the value, the type of effect during variable display is determined (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). That is, since the criteria for determining the type of effect are different between the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect, the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect are different. , the execution of the same effect type is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the production control CPU 120 executes the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 in the case where the variable display production is executed in the first period and the case where the variable display production is executed in the second period. parts that run at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, 8-34 as a fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, and the pattern PT -8 or the part that executes reach notices based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display during the period, regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the effect control CPU 120 is the first Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate regardless of the set value when executing variable display production in 2 periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set A part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and when the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the first period, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, a form of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the setting value is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the variation pattern, it is determined whether to execute setting suggestion or reach notice only according to the set value. may

In addition, in the second period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is not limited to this Instead, in the second period, depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, reach notice and setting suggestion may be determined at the same rate.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the second period, the form of determining whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach was exemplified, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may make it determine whether.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the characterizing portion 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. A mode in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period from the timing to the start timing of the normal reach effect and the second period after the first period has been exemplified, but the present invention is this. However, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is pseudo-variably displayed a plurality of times. It may be executed at the timing according to the re-variation of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect that looks like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-38 as modification 2, for all fluctuation patterns of non-reach/small hit, normal reach and super reach, from the start timing of variable display to the start timing of normal reach reach production a first period before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, a second period after the first period and corresponding to a re-variable display period after the first temporary stop of the decoration pattern, The effect during variable display can be executed in the third period which is after the second period and corresponds to the re-variable display period after the temporary stop of the decoration pattern for the third time.

In addition, in this modification 2, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first period. Executed according to the re-variable display at the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the second period is executed according to the re-variable display at the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the third period is executed according to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. It may be executed according to the re-variable display.

In this modification 2, in the above-described effect determination process during variable display, for the first period, regardless of which variation pattern, any one of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 , and for the second period and the third period, variable display based on the set value only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach A process for determining the type of presentation is executed.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the variation pattern (does not determine execution of the reach notice). It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the second period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and execution of setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is decided at a rate of 100%, and execution of setting suggestion is not decided. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period By setting the ratio of determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period or the second period is performed. When executing the effect during variable display in three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. In other words, since the determination criteria for the performance control CPU 120 to determine the performance mode of the predetermined performance are different between the first period, the second period, and the third period, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a variation pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit increases as the number of times of re-variable display increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, and so on. Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first re-variable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second re-variable In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is also the possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice, and the third re-variable In the third period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is super reach, so the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

In this way, in the case of a variation pattern involving one or two pseudo-continuous performances, it is possible to suggest settings while suppressing the decrease in the reliability of the ready-to-win announcement due to frequent occurrence of the ready-to-win announcement. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation for the big win due to frequent occurrence of setting suggestion in the case of the variation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous performances.

In addition, in the second modification, in the first period in which the reliability of the jackpot is the lowest, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, rather than the reach notice, so the setting suggestion is preferable. On the other hand, in the second and third periods in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than in the first period, the reach notice is set according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Since the decision is made with priority, the player's expectation for the big win can be favorably increased.

In addition, in this modified example 2, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a rate of 100%, but in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice. If there is, it does not have to be the one that determines the execution of setting suggestions at a rate of 100%. Also, in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice, but the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Also, in the third period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified at a rate of 100%, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, the reach notice It does not have to be a 100% decision on execution.

Further, in this modification 2, in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern Although the execution of the reach notice is determined according to whether it is normal reach or super reach with priority over the setting suggestion, the present invention is not limited to this, the first period and the second period , regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be determined with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the setting value with priority over the reach notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of In the first number of times (e.g., the first period or the second period), at least if the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the setting value, the setting suggestion or according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern You may make it determine reach notice.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the second period and the third period, according to the setting value and the variation pattern, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is to this It is not limited, and in the second number of times (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number of times among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or the reach notice may be determined according to the setting value and the variation pattern.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as an effect during the variable display executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is determined by making the rate at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the rate at which the ready-to-reach notice is determined. Although a form in which execution is determined with priority is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. As for the effect, the setting suggestion may be preferentially determined according to the order of the processing for determining the effect type.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as the effect during the variable display executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined is set higher than the rate at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although a form in which execution is prioritized is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. As an effect, execution of the ready-to-win announcement may be preferentially determined according to the order of processing for determining the effect type.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the effects during variable display can be executed multiple times in one variable display. It may be executable over the variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 suspends and stores information (for example, display results (including jackpot types), random numbers for determining variation patterns, etc.) related to variable display whose execution is suspended when a starting prize is generated. , and the display result and the fluctuation pattern are prefetched and determined based on the extracted random value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as the effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 If it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that predicts the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended), the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice A reach notice or a setting suggestion may be executed as a pre-read notice for the target change over a plurality of times of variable display until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 during the variable display effect at predetermined timings. A form of executing the process of changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the middle production determination process to the image Z2 indicating that the images will be destroyed and dropped has been exemplified, but the present invention has been described. is not limited to this, and when the player's operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 changes at the timing corresponding to the operation. You can let it run.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player in the variable display effect as described above, the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation valid period of the push button 31B is performed. An operation prompting image (for example, a character image or a button image that says “Continue hitting!”) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect.

Further, when the push sensor 35B detects a specific action of operating the push button 31B during the operation effective period of the push button 31B, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is being operated, an effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying and dropping the paraglider) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B was not detected. In some cases, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be ended without performing reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, a player who knows the specific action can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, as an operation promoting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the effective period of operation of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the operation promoting effect is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting part built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific action or the player who has noticed the light emission can see the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state indication result, a form is exemplified in which a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the predetermined effects that result in the indication of an advantageous state include a stop symbol notice suggesting which pattern the variable display will stop at, a character notice that a character will appear, and a step in which the notice image changes step by step. Various advance notice effects can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects suggesting the possibility of a big hit, such as an advance notice, a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area, and the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common effect period common to the reach notice and the setting suggestion. It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is suggested using a character, the setting suggestion is suggested by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the advance notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion different from the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 in the same period (at the same timing). In this case, the visibility of the first effect image can be improved by, for example, making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by differentiating the display mode such as the emission color, brightness, contrast, etc. is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and the setting When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn on the second drawing layer which is lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn on the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer on the image display device 5 are drawn. When the first effect image is overlapped and displayed on the second effect image, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image. By doing so, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is set higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance of the second effect image (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound modes such as the volume and quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. , that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of enhancing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only increasing the volume of the sound effect, but also decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM to increase the audibility. good too. It should be noted that there are cases where the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Furthermore, when the production control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any one of the reproduction channels , for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-win notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. In addition, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (the first reproduction channel and the second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced on the first reproduction channel The audibility of the first effect sound is made higher than the audibility of the second effect sound by making the volume and sound quality different from (improving) the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound reproduced on the second reproduction channel, It is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by changing the light emission mode such as the color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 between the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light-emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win notice is changed to the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. In other words, the light emission mode corresponding to the reach advance notice may be made more visible than the light emission mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. In addition, the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off in response to the setting suggestion.

In other words, when the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, the production result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In addition to increasing the execution ratio of the reach notice in the case, when the production result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the production mode such as the display, sound, and light of the reach notice is higher than the production mode of the setting suggestion Including priority etc. Furthermore, executing the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, sound , light, and movement of movable bodies.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion indicates which of the setting values 1 to 6 is set as the setting suggestion in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be, for example, a suggestion of the possibility that the setting value has been changed or the possibility that the setting value has not been changed (deferred).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be established, high probability game state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a jackpot game state, high probability low base state (latent probability variable state), special reach state (for example , super reach, etc.), including a state where the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on a big hit variation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

In the slot machine, a state that is advantageous to the player means a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the probability of winning a small combination, or a state in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is announced (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), and a state in which an advantageous operation mode for the player is notified and the probability of winning a replay combination increases (for example, ART (Assist Replay Time) state).

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed in a slot machine, a special combination such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not complete and the special combination is carried over. Suggestion effects suggesting the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols will be derived and displayed, setting suggestions suggesting the setting value set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (multiple variable displays), AT state It is possible to execute over a plurality of games (multiple times of variable display) from the time an ART state is won until the AT state or ART state is started.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 097IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 097IW will be described.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 9-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 097IW. Among them, FIG. 9A shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for loss. Also, FIG. 9-1(B) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for big wins. As shown in FIG. 9-1(A), in this example, in the case of a loss, one of the variation patterns PA1 to PA5 is determined as the variation pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1(B), in this example, when a big win is achieved, one of the variation patterns PB2 to PB5 is determined as the variation pattern.

In this example, the variation pattern PA1 is a variation pattern that designates normal variation. Also, the variation patterns PA2 and PB2 are variation patterns that designate execution of normal reach during the variable display of decorative symbols. Also, the variation patterns PA3 and PB3 are variation patterns that designate execution of Super Reach A during the variation display of decorative symbols. Also, the variation patterns PA4 and PB4 are variation patterns that designate execution of Super Reach B during the variable display of decorative symbols. Also, the variation patterns PA5 and PB5 are variation patterns that designate execution of Super Reach C during the variable display of decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, when super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) is executed, expectations for a big hit are higher than when normal reach is executed reliability (reliability) is high. In addition, among the three types of super reach, when super reach C is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is the highest, and when super reach B is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is second. It is high, and the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is the lowest when Super Reach A is executed. Therefore, in this example, the normal reach and the super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) are directed as to whether or not the jackpot will be achieved, and which type of reach is executed. The degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit differs depending on the number.

Next, the operation of the production control means (production control CPU 120) will be described.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 097IWS101). Next, the effect control CPU 120 is the variation pattern command (effect control command that specifies the variation pattern) read in step 097IWS 101, and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command ( The display result (stopped pattern) of the decoration pattern is determined according to the performance control command for designating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small win, and the type of big win (step 097 IWS 102). That is, by executing the processing of step 097IWS102 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 097IWS102, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the hit is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

In step 097 IWS 102, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, as a stop symbol, the decorative pattern in which three symbols are the same probability variation pattern (for example, an odd number pattern). Decide on a combination. In addition, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 includes a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same non-variable symbols (for example, even-numbered symbols) as the stop symbols. to decide. Further, for example, when the received display result specifying command indicates a small hit, a small hit pattern (for example, a combination of "135" patterns) is determined as the stop pattern. Also, when the received display result designation command indicates a failure, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a chance-up effect setting process for setting the presence and type of the chance-up effect during super reach (step 097IWS103). In this example, the "chance-up effect" is a effect that is executed in such a manner that the expectation for the big win is further heightened (the chance is increased) during execution of the super reach.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the chance-up effect if the variation pattern and execution of the chance-up effect have been determined (step 097IWS104). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 097IWS105).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 in the effect control board 12 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern with the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set.

In addition, in particular, in the case of a variation pattern (variation patterns PA3 to PA5, PB3 to PB5) with super reach A to C, a process table including super reach A to C is selected in step 097IWS 104, and the selected By executing step 097IWS106 and step 097IWS305 of the effect processing during variable display (step S172) according to the process table, super reach A to C are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Further, when super reach A to C are executed, if execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the chance-up effect setting process of step 097IWS103, a process table including the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104, According to the selected process table, step 097IWS106 and step 097IWS305 of the effect processing during variable display (step S172) are executed, so that super reach A to C are executed while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the chance increases. A performance is performed.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 097IWS106).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 097IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decoration pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 097IWS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 097IWS108), and terminates the variable display start setting process.

(Chance up production setting process)
FIG. 9-3 is a flow chart showing the chance-up effect setting process (step 097IWS103). In the chance-up effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA3, PB3) including super reach A (step 097 IWS201 ). If it is a variation pattern including super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table A as a table for determining the presence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS202). Then, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS207.

If it is not a variation pattern including super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA4, PB4) including super reach B ( Step 097 IWS 203). If it is a variation pattern including super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table B as a table for determining the presence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS204). Then, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS207.

If it is not a variation pattern including super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA5, PB5) including super reach C ( step 097 IWS 205). If it is a variation pattern including super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table C as a table for determining the presence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS206). Then, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS207.

If the variation pattern does not include super reach C (N in step 097 IWS205), that is, if the variation pattern includes non-reach loss or normal reach, the chance-up effect setting process is terminated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the chance-up effect determination table selected in steps 097IWS202, S204, and S206 to perform lottery processing based on random numbers to determine the presence and type of chance-up effect (step 097IWS207).

9-4 to 9-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the chance-up effect determination table. Among them, FIG. 9-4 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table A selected at step 097IWS202. FIG. 9-5 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table B selected at step 097IWS204. FIG. 9-6 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table C selected at step 097IWS206.

First, the chance-up effect determination table A (chance-up effect determination table for super reach A) will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the chance-up effect determination table A, judgment values are assigned to no chance-up effect and chance-up effect A1 to A7.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when super reach A is executed, in principle four images of image A1, image A2, image A3 and image A4 are generated during execution of super reach A. displayed in order. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-4, these images A1, A2, A3 and A4 are basically displayed in any one of white, blue, green or red display colors. Among these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images A1, A2, A3, and A4 are displayed in white, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and when these images A1, A2, A3, and A4 are displayed in blue, green, and red, chances are up. This corresponds to a state in which a production is being executed. Therefore, in this example, when the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach A, the expectation for the big win is further increased (the chance is increased).

In this example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 displayed during super reach A, image B1, image B2, and image B3 displayed during super reach B to be described later, and super reach to be described later. The image C1 and the image C2 displayed during reach C are also referred to as chance-up images.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects A1 to A7 for chance-up effects to be executed during super reach A. The “chance-up effect A1” is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a blue display color. The "chance-up effect A2" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in green. The "chance-up effect A3" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A2 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect A1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect A3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect A2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and when each chance-up image is displayed in green. has the next highest level of expectation (reliability) for the big win, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is displayed in white). The expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when it is displayed).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red. The “chance up effect A4” is a chance up effect in which the image A1 and the image A2 are displayed in blue color, and then the image A3 and image A4 are displayed in green color. In the "chance up effect A5", the image A1 and the image A2 are displayed in blue color, then the image A3 is displayed in green color, and the image A4 is displayed in red color. It is an up performance. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red. ) is displayed in a low display color, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation for the chance-up image that will be displayed after that.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color changes from a display color with a high degree of expectation (reliability) for a big win to a display color with a low degree of expectation. (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged after his expectation for the big win has increased.

Further, in this example, in principle, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of super reach A to super reach C, but a common chance up image is displayed for super reach A and super reach B. may occur. "Chance-up effect A6" is a chance-up effect in which image X that can be displayed in common with super reach B is displayed instead of image A1, and then image A2, image A3 and image A4 are displayed in order. In this example, when the common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image A2, image A3, image A4) is displayed in rainbow display colors. By displaying in such a rainbow display color different from blue, green, and red, it is possible for the player to recognize that the common mode image is displayed as the chance-up image.

In this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in rainbow color, the expectation for the big win is further increased (chance is increased), so the display color in rainbow color also corresponds to the special mode.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. The “chance up effect A7” is a chance up effect in which the image A1, the image A2 and the image A3 are displayed in white color and then the image A4 is displayed in red color. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when a big win is achieved. There is no allocation of values, and the jackpot is determined. With such a configuration, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation.

Next, the chance-up effect determination table B (chance-up effect determination table for super reach B) will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5. As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the chance-up effect determination table B, judgment values are assigned to no chance-up effect and chance-up effect B1 to B7, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, when super reach B is executed, in principle, three images of image B1, image B2 and image B3 are displayed in order during execution of super reach B. be. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-5, these images B1, B2 and B3 are basically displayed in one of white, blue, green or red display colors. Among these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images B1, B2 and B3 are displayed in white, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Also, among these display colors, blue, green and red correspond to special modes, and when these images B1, B2 and B3 are displayed in blue, green and red, a chance-up effect is executed. Equivalent to the state of Therefore, in this example, when the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach B, the expectation for the big win is further increased (the chance is increased).

As shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects B1 to B7 for the chance-up effects to be executed during the super ready-to-win B. The “chance-up effect B1” is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in blue. The "chance-up effect B2" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in green. The "chance-up effect B3" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect B1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect B3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect B2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and when each chance-up image is displayed in green. has the next highest level of expectation (reliability) for the big win, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is displayed in white). The expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red. The “chance-up effect B4” is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 is displayed in a blue display color, and then the images B2 and B3 are displayed in a green display color. The "chance-up effect B5" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 is displayed in blue, then the image B2 is displayed in green, and the image B3 is displayed in red. be. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red. ) is displayed in a low display color, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation for the chance-up image that will be displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color changes from a display color with a high degree of expectation (reliability) for a big win to a display color with a low degree of expectation (reliability). (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged after his expectation for the big win has increased.

Further, in this example, in principle, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of super reach A to super reach C, but a common chance up image is displayed for super reach A and super reach B. may occur. The “chance up effect B6” is a chance up effect in which an image X that can be displayed in common with the super reach A is displayed instead of the image B1, and then images B2 and B3 are displayed in order. In this example, when the common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image B2, image B3) is displayed in rainbow display colors. By displaying in such a rainbow display color different from blue, green, and red, it is possible for the player to recognize that the common mode image is displayed as the chance-up image.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect B7” is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 and the image B2 are displayed in white and then the image B3 is displayed in red. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when a big win is achieved. There is no allocation of values, and the jackpot is determined. With such a configuration, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation.

Next, the chance-up effect determination table C (chance-up effect determination table for super reach C) will be described with reference to FIG. 9-6. As shown in FIG. 9-6, in the chance-up effect determination table C, judgment values are assigned to no chance-up effect and chance-up effect C1 to C5.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, when super reach C is performed, two images, image C1 and image C2, are displayed in order during super reach C, in principle. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-6, these images C1 and C2 are basically displayed in any one of white, blue, green, or red display colors. Among these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images C1 and C2 are displayed in white, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to the special mode, and when these images C1 and C2 are displayed in blue, green, and red, the chance-up effect is executed. Corresponds to state. Therefore, in this example, when the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in blue, green, and red during the super reach C, the expectation for the big win is further increased (the chance is increased).

As shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, there are five types of chance-up effects C1 to C5 for the chance-up effects to be executed during the super ready-to-win C. The "chance-up effect C1" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in blue. The "chance-up effect C2" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in green. The "chance-up effect C3" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect C1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect C3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect C2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and when each chance-up image is displayed in green. has the next highest level of expectation (reliability) for the big win, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is displayed in white). The expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when it is displayed).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. The "chance-up effect C4" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in a green display color and then the image C2 is displayed in a red display color. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red, so the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is high. Even when the chance-up image is displayed in a low display color, it is possible to have expectations for the chance-up image that will be displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color changes from a display color with a high degree of expectation (reliability) for a big win to a display color with a low degree of expectation (reliability). (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged after his expectation for the big win has increased.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-6, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect C5” is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in white and then the image C2 is displayed in red. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C5 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when a big win is achieved. There is no allocation of values, and the jackpot is determined. With such a configuration, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation.

Incidentally, in this example, using the chance-up effect determination tables A to C shown in FIGS. Although the case where it is decided by doing is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the case of executing Super Reach A, if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in one lottery process, the display color of each chance-up image (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) is changed individually. may be determined by the lottery process.

Further, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes, it is set in advance so that there is no case where the display color with high expectation (reliability) for the big win changes to a low display color (there is no case of losing the chance). Although the case where the patterns (chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4) are determined has been shown, the determination method is not limited to this. For example, when the display color of each chance-up image is determined by individual lottery processing, the chance-up image that is displayed later than the chance-up image that is displayed first is prohibited from being inferior. may be configured to perform In this case, for example, when the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed first is determined, when the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later is determined, the degree of expectation higher than or the same as the display color is determined. The display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later may be determined by performing lottery processing using a determination table that includes only display colors. Further, for example, when a display color with a lower expectation level than the chance-up image that is displayed first is determined, the determination result is discarded, and a display color with a higher level of expectation level or the same level of expectation level than that display color is selected. The process of determining the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later may be repeatedly executed until the color is determined.

Also, the types of chance-up effects are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6. For example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), the display color changes stepwise in order of blue, green, and red. However, for example, it may be configured such that there is a pattern in which green is skipped and blue changes to red.

Further, for example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), after the chance-up image is displayed in the previous display color, A case has been shown in which the displayed chance-up image is displayed in a different display color (the display color itself of the chance-up image that has been displayed once does not change in the middle). It is not limited to any form. For example, when executing Super Reach A, after the image A1 is displayed in blue as a chance-up image, the display color of the image A1 itself may be changed to green or red after that. .

Further, in this example, when super reach A and B are executed, there is a case where the common image X is displayed as the first chance up image (chance up effects A6 and B6). Although the case where it does is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, all chance-up images displayed during super reach A and B may be displayed as a common image X, or two or three chance-up images may be displayed as a common image X. It may be configured as

In this example, the common image X may be displayed only when Super Reach A and B are executed. may be configured so that there is a pattern in which is displayed.

Further, in this example, when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode) and then in red (special mode) (chance-up effects A7, B7, C5), the big win is confirmed. Although the case of allocating the judgment value is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the chance-up image changes from white (normal mode) to red (special mode), it may be configured such that there is a low probability that it will be shifted.

Also, for example, the chance-up image may be configured to have a pattern that changes from white (normal mode) to blue, green, or rainbow colors as a special mode.

Further, for example, even if the chance-up image changes from blue to green or red, or from green to red, as in chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4, the big win is confirmed. It may be configured to allocate the judgment value so that there is a case to do.

Also, in this example, the case where three types of super reach A to C are configured to be executable has been shown, but this is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, four or more types of super reach can be configured to be executable. Alternatively, only two types of super reach may be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to provide a type of super reach in which the chance-up image is not displayed and the chance-up effect is not executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the chance-up image can be displayed up to four times during super reach has been shown, but the configuration is not limited to such an aspect, and the chance-up image can be displayed five times or more. good.

As described above, various aspects can be considered as aspects of the chance-up effect.

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIG. 9-7 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 097IWS301) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 097IWS302). When the process timer times out (step 097 IWS303), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 097 IWS 304). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 097IWS305).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of Super Reach AC is being executed (step 097IWS306). If none of Super Reach A to C is in progress, go to step 097 IWS316. If any one of Super Reach A to C is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to display one of the chance-up images (step 097IWS307). If it is time to display the chance-up image, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the chance-up image to be displayed in the display color (white, blue, green, red, control to display in rainbow color) (step 097 IWS 308). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display an effect display around the chance-up image in the same display colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow colors) as the chance-up image displayed. (Step 097 IWS309).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display color of the displayed chance-up image and effect image is white (normal mode) (step 097IWS310). If the display color is white (normal mode), the process proceeds to step 097 IWS316. If the display color is not white (normal mode) (that is, if it is a special mode), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 097IWS311). Then, step 097 moves to IWS316.

By executing the processing of steps 097, IWS310 and S311, in this example, the notification sound is output only when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode. can be made

If it is not the display timing of the chance up image (N of step 097IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is within the operation effective period of the push button 31B (step 097IWS312). In this example, an operation valid period is provided in the latter half of the performance period of each of Super Reach A to C, and if the push button 31B is pressed within the operation valid period, or the push button 31B is not operated. When the operation valid period has passed, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a win/fail result report indicating whether or not a jackpot will be achieved. In this example, the display timing of each chance-up image is provided in the first half of the effect period of each super reach A to C (period before the operation valid period), and each chance-up image can be displayed. This period is configured so as not to overlap with the period during which the valid period of operation and the notification of the success/failure result can be displayed.

If it is not within the valid period of operation, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS316. If it is within the operation effective period, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the push button 31 is turned on (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input) (step 097 IWS 313 ). If the push button 31 is on, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS315.

If the push button 31 is not turned on, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to end the valid operation period (step 097IWS314). If the end timing of the operation effective period has not come, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS316. If the push button 31 is turned on (Y of step 097IWS313), or if it is time to end the valid operation period (Y of step 097IWS314), the effect control CPU 120 displays the result of success or failure on the image display device 5. Control to display the notification is performed (step 097IWS315).

At step 097 IWS 315, the effect control CPU 120, for example, confirms the display result indicated by the display result specifying command, and if it is a big hit, performs control to display a character display such as "big hit" as a win/fail result notification. . In addition, in the case of losing, control is performed to display a character display such as "missing" as a success/failure result notification.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step 097IWS316). If the variable time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step 097IWS317), and terminates the effect process during variable display.

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the display timing of the chance-up image and the success/failure result notification during execution of Super Reach will be described. FIG. 9-8 is a timing chart for explaining the display timing of the chance-up image and the success/failure result notification during execution of Super Reach. Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 9-8, as an example, when super reach A is executed, chance up effect A3 is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, at timing T1, the image display device 5 starts the variable display of left, middle, and right ornamental patterns, and then, at timing T2, it becomes ready-to-win establishment timing and normal ready-to-win starts. Then, after that, at timing T3, when it is time to develop to super reach, super reach A is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8, during execution of Super Reach A, image A1, image A2, image A3 and image A4 can be displayed as chance up images. As shown in FIG. 9-8, in this example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in the first half period T3 to T4 of the effect period of super reach A before the effective operation period. is possible. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-8, in this example, when the chance-up images (image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4) are displayed, effect images are also displayed at the same time. Also, the effect image is displayed in the same display color as the chance-up image. The example shown in FIGS. 9-8 shows a case where each effect image is displayed in red in response to each chance-up image being displayed in red.

FIG. 9-8 is an example. When each chance amplifier image is displayed in green, the effect image is also displayed in green, and when each chance amplifier image is displayed in blue, the effect image is also displayed. When each chance amplifier image is displayed in blue, the effect image is also displayed in rainbow color, and when each chance amplifier image is displayed in white (normal mode), the effect image is also displayed. Displayed in white (normal mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8, in the latter half of the performance period of Super Reach A, for example, the effective operation period starts from timing T4, and if the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected within the effective operation period, The display of the win/fail result notification is started at the timing (timing T5) when the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected. If the push button 31B is not operated within the valid period of operation, display of the success/failure result is started at the end of the valid period of operation. Then, when the fluctuation time ends (timing T6), the variable display of the decoration design is finished, and the stop design of the decoration design is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5 .

In this example, the display of the win/fail result notification is started at the end of the valid period of operation when the operation is not performed. may be configured not to display the winning/failing result notification.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, in this example, it is possible to display a chance-up image and an effect image in the first half of the Super Reach execution period, and to display the win/fail result notification in the latter half of the period. be. Also, in the latter half of the production, the display of chance-up images and effect images is restricted. Therefore, the player's attention can be focused on the success/fail result notification.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the chance-up image and the effect image are configured to be displayed only in the first half of the Super Reach execution period, and the win/fail result is announced in the latter half of the performance. is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, regardless of the timing during the execution period of Super Reach, it is possible to display the chance-up image and the effect image, and when the display timing of the chance-up image and the effect image comes, the operation valid period It may be configured to perform a prohibition process so as not to display the chance-up image or the effect image when the middle or winning/fail result notification is being displayed.

Further, for example, instead of not displaying the chance-up image or the effect image at all during the operation valid period or while the success/fail result notification is being displayed, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed at an extremely low rate. . Further, for example, during the effective period of operation or during the display of the success/fail result notification, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed in an inconspicuous display mode such as reducing the display size. It is sufficient that the display of the chance-up image and the effect image is restricted in some form.

(Example of Super Reach production)
Next, the effect mode of Super Reach will be described. 9-9 to 9-16 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of super ready-to-win effects. Among them, FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10 show a specific example of the effect mode of super reach A accompanied by the chance-up effect. Also, FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 show a specific example of the effect mode of super reach B accompanied by a chance-up effect. Also, FIGS. 9-13 and 9-14 show a specific example of the effect mode of super reach A without the chance-up effect. Also, FIGS. 9-15 and 9-16 show a specific example of the effect mode of super reach B without the chance-up effect. In FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . .

First, with reference to FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, the effect mode of Super Reach A with the chance-up effect will be described. Incidentally, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, as an example, a case where it is decided to execute the chance-up effect A3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-9(A), the image display device 5 performs variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and as shown in FIG. 9-9(B), the left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to enter the ready-to-win state. Next, it is time to develop into Super Reach A, and as shown in FIG. 9C, a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Enter Super Reach A" are displayed as the character's words. A display is displayed and Super Reach A is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-9(C), when Super Reach A is started, the variable display of the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when it comes time to display the image A1, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW12 simulating a bird as the image A1, as shown in FIG. 9D. Further, since execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 9D, the wing portion of the bird is displayed in red in the image 097IW12 (see step 097IWS308). . Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, the effect image 097IW13 is displayed in red around the image 097IW12 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it is time to display the image A2, an image 097IW14 imitating a bird different from the image A1 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the image A2, as shown in FIG. 9E. Further, since execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been determined, as shown in FIG. 9-10(E), the wing portion of the bird is displayed in red in the image 097IW14 (see step 097IWS308). . Also, as shown in FIG. 9-10(E), the effect image 097IW15 is displayed in red around the image 097IW14 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes time to display the image A3, as shown in FIG. 9-10(F), an image 097IW16 imitating a bird different from the images A1 and A2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the image A3. . Further, since execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 9-10(F), the wing portion of the bird is displayed in red in the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS308). . Further, as shown in FIG. 9-10(F), the effect image 097IW17 is displayed in red around the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes time to display the image A4, as shown in FIG. 9G, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW18 imitating a bird different from the images A1, A2, and A3 as the image A4. Is displayed. Further, since execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 9-10(G), the wing portion of the bird is displayed in red in the image 097IW18 (see step 097IWS308). . Also, as shown in FIG. 9-10(G), an effect image 097IW19 is displayed in red around the image 097IW18 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12, the effect mode of super reach B accompanied by the chance-up effect will be described. Incidentally, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12, as an example, the case where execution of the chance-up effect B3 is decided will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-11(A), the image display device 5 performs variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and as shown in FIG. 9-11(B), the left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to enter the ready-to-win state. Next, it is time to develop into Super Reach B, and as shown in FIG. 9-11(C), a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Enter Super Reach B" are displayed as the character's words. A display is displayed and Super Reach B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-11(C), when Super Reach B is started, the variable display of the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when it comes time to display the image B1, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW22 simulating the moon as the image B1, as shown in FIG. 9D. Further, since execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, the moon is displayed in red in the image 097IW22 as shown in FIG. 9-11(D) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 9-11(D), the effect image 097IW23 is displayed in red around the image 097IW22 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes time to display the image B2, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW24 imitating Jupiter as the image B2, as shown in FIG. 9-12(E). Further, since execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, Jupiter is displayed in red in the image 097IW24 as shown in FIG. 9-12(E) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 9-12(E), the effect image 097IW25 is displayed in red around the image 097IW24 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes time to display the image B3, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW26 imitating Saturn as the image B3, as shown in FIG. 9-12(F). Further, since execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, Saturn is displayed in red in the image 097IW26 as shown in FIG. 9-12(F) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 9-12(F), the effect image 097IW27 is displayed in red around the image 097IW26 (see step 097IWS309). Furthermore, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, the notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9-13 and 9-14, the effect mode of super reach A without the chance-up effect will be described. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-13 and 9-14, it is assumed that it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect. As shown in FIG. 9-13(A), the image display device 5 performs variable display of left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and as shown in FIG. 9-13(B), left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to enter the ready-to-win state. Next, it is time to develop into Super Reach A, and as shown in FIG. 9-13(C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Enter Super Reach A" are displayed as the character's words. A display is displayed and Super Reach A is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-13(C), when Super Reach A is started, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when it comes time to display the image A1, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW32 simulating a bird as the image A1, as shown in FIG. 9D. Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in the image 097IW32 as shown in FIG. 9-13(D) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 9-13(D), an effect image 097IW33 is displayed in white around the image 097IW32 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, when it comes time to display the image A2, an image 097IW34 imitating a bird different from the image A1 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the image A2, as shown in FIG. 9-14(E). Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in the image 097IW34 as shown in FIG. 9-14(E) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 9-14(E), an effect image 097IW35 is displayed in white around the image 097IW34 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, when it comes time to display the image A3, as shown in FIG. 9-14(F), the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW36 imitating a bird different from the images A1 and A2 as the image A3. . Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in the image 097IW36 as shown in FIG. 9-14(F) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 9-14(F), the effect image 097IW37 is displayed in white around the image 097IW36 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, when it comes time to display the image A4, as shown in FIG. 9-14(G), the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW38 imitating a bird different from the images A1, A2, and A3 as the image A4. Is displayed. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in the image 097IW38 as shown in FIG. 9-14(G) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-14(G), an effect image 097IW39 is displayed in white around the image 097IW38 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9-15 and 9-16, the effect mode of super reach B without the chance-up effect will be described. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-15 and 9-16, it is assumed that it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect. As shown in FIG. 9-15(A), the image display device 5 performs variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and as shown in FIG. 9-15(B), the left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to enter the ready-to-win state. Next, it is time to develop into Super Reach B, and as shown in FIG. 9-15(C), a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Enter Super Reach B" are displayed as the character's words. A display is displayed and Super Reach B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-15(C), when Super Reach B is started, the variable display of the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when it comes time to display the image B1, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW42 simulating the moon as the image B1, as shown in FIG. 9D. Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the moon is displayed in white in the image 097IW42 as shown in FIG. 9-15(D) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 9-15(D), an effect image 097IW43 is displayed in white around the image 097IW42 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, when the display timing of the image B2 comes, an image 097IW44 imitating Jupiter is displayed on the image display device 5 as the image B2, as shown in FIG. 9-16(E). Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Jupiter is displayed in white in the image 097IW44 as shown in FIG. 9-16(E) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 9-16(E), an effect image 097IW45 is displayed in white around the image 097IW44 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, when it comes time to display the image B3, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW46 simulating Saturn as the image B3, as shown in FIG. 9-16(F). Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Saturn is displayed in white in the image 097IW46 as shown in FIG. 9-16(F) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 9-16(F), the effect image 097IW47 is displayed in white around the image 097IW46 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21, unlike the chance-up image, do not particularly change in display mode depending on whether it is a losing variation or a big hit variation. , are images displayed in a display mode unrelated to expectations for a big hit.

9-9 to 9-16 show super reach A and super reach B as an example, but when super reach C is executed, it is executed in a similar effect mode. For example, FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16 show the case of displaying an image simulating a bird or an image of a celestial object as the chance-up image. (for example, an image imitating a vehicle such as a car or an airplane) is displayed, and in the same manner as in FIGS. It may be displayed in a normal mode (white), or an effect image may be displayed in a special mode (blue, green, red) or in a normal mode (white).

Further, for example, when the chance-up effect A6 or the chance-up effect B6 is executed, a common image (for example, a common character image or a common item image) is used as the image X instead of the image A1 or the image B1. The common image X and the effect image that are displayed are displayed in rainbow colors, and the chance-up image and the effect image that are displayed after that are also displayed in rainbow colors.

It should be noted that, in this example, as shown in FIGS. In the case of displaying the chance-up images (image B1, image B2, and image B3) during execution of reach B, the chance-up image is displayed by adding a common white display color effect image. The mode of the common effect image to be displayed is not limited to such a mode. For example, an image of exactly the same shape and exactly the same display color (for example, an effect image) may be added to display a chance-up image, or an image of a different shape but the same display color may be added. A common image may be added to display the chance-up image. In the case of displaying such a chance-up image in the normal mode, it is not limited to the case of adding a production element such as the completely same image, but it is also possible to add a production element such as a similar image. Any configuration may be used as long as it is configured to display a chance-up image by adding a common effect element.

As described above, according to this characteristic portion 097IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect (eg, super reach A to C) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state). A specific image (for example, chance up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) can be displayed during execution of the specific effect. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B), and a specific image As, at least, the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4) can be displayed during execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image ( For example, image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed. In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (e.g., white) and a specific image in a special mode (e.g., blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation of being controlled in a more advantageous state than in the normal mode and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 as shown in FIGS. does not change). Further, when displaying the specific image in the special mode, the specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), and the specific image can be displayed in the normal mode. When displaying the specific image, the specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) different from the first special effect element. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is the preview image, and to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Specifically, when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow colors), the chance-up image is displayed in a normal mode (for example, white) only by displaying the effect image in the special mode. If the configuration is such that no effect image is displayed when is displayed, the player cannot be made to recognize that the chance-up image is the forewarning image. Therefore, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in the normal mode, the effect image in the normal mode is displayed. , and the player can be made to pay attention to the chance-up image.

Further, in this example, when the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode (when the chance-up is not performed), the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a relatively inconspicuous display color (white in this example). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being unnecessarily conspicuous when the chance-up is not performed, and conversely, it is possible to increase the degree of recognition when the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the special mode.

It should be noted that adding the first special effect element and the second special effect element may be, for example, generating and displaying an image obtained by adding an effect image to the chance-up image, or creating and displaying the chance-up image and the effect image. Although the process of synthesizing the image with the image is not executed, the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed close to each other or superimposed to make it look as if the effect image is added to the chance-up image. good too.

In addition, the first special effect element and the second special effect element are not limited to being effect images, and other images (for example, character images and item images) displayed so as to be added to the chance-up image in some form. ). Further, for example, as the first special effect element and the second special effect element, a lamp or LED near the display area of the chance-up image is displayed, or a predetermined effect sound is output in a manner associated with the chance-up image. , and it is sufficient if it adds a production element in some form.

Further, in this example, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 are shown as specific examples of the "predetermined image", but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, during execution of super reach, the background image and the item image may be displayed as predetermined images in a manner that does not change regardless of the degree of expectation.

Also, in this example, the case of executing Super Reach A to C is shown as a specific example of the "specific effect", but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a notice effect or a pseudo-continuation can be executed as the specific effect, and during execution of the notice effect or the pseudo-continuation, a chance-up image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode, and an effect image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode. It may be configured to Further, for example, a promotion performance suggesting whether or not to be promoted to a variable probability big win during a big win game may be executed as a specific performance, and a chance-up image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode during execution of the promotion performance. , and the effect image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode. Various modes are conceivable as such a specific effect.

Further, in this example, regarding "the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state", specifically, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 other than the chance-up image is changed. However, "unrelated" means that the expectation for a big win such as the chance-up image is not a factor for chance-up. Therefore, even when images other than these chance-up images are displayed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win varies depending on the type of super ready-to-win where those images are displayed.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, during the execution of the first specific effect, the first specific image is displayed in different modes (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow colors) according to the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state. The first specific image is displayed by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors) that is displayable and has a display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the difference in the mode of the specific image by the display mode of the added first special effect element.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, it is possible to display an image of a common mode (for example, the image X) as the first specific image and the second specific image. The first specific image and the second specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with rainbow display colors). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, it is possible to execute notification effects (for example, output of notification sound) when the specific image is displayed with the addition of the first special effect element. Further, when the specific image is displayed with the addition of the second special effect element, the notification effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware only when there is a high degree of expectation that the control will be in an advantageous state.

Note that this example shows a case where a common notification sound is output regardless of whether the chance-up image or the effect image is displayed in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. It is not limited to such aspects. For example, when the common image X is displayed as the chance-up image and the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in rainbow colors, a dedicated notification sound different from blue, green, and red is output. may be configured. Further, even when the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in blue, green, or red, different notification sounds may be output depending on whether the color is blue, green, or red.

Further, according to the characteristic part 097IW, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, chance-up effects A7, B7, C5) for changing a specific image to which the second special effect element is added to a specific image to which the first special effect element is added. is. Therefore, even when the specific image is displayed with the addition of the second special effect element, the sense of anticipation can be maintained.

In addition, according to the present characteristic portion 097IW, the effect of the first period (for example, the effect of the first half of the effect period of Super Reach AC) and whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state after the first period It is possible to execute a specific effect including a second period effect (eg, effect in the latter half of the effect period of Super Reach AC) including effect (eg, success/failure result notification) to notify. Further, the specific image can be displayed during the first period, and display of the specific image during the second period is restricted (see FIGS. 9-8). Therefore, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on whether or not the control is to be in an advantageous state.

In this example, the display of the chance-up image and the effect image is restricted during the operation effective period in the second half of Super Reach and the period during which the success/fail result notification is displayed. For example, when executing a production that develops from a weak reach with low expectations to a strong reach with high expectations during the execution of super reach, the frequency of displaying chance up images and effect images is high during the period of low reach, and strong It may be configured such that the display of the chance-up image and the effect image is restricted during the reach period.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect (eg, super reach A to C) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, a big hit game state), and execution of the specific effect A specific image (for example, chance up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) can be displayed therein. Also, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects (eg, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (eg, super reach A) and a second specific effect (eg, super reach B). In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (e.g., white) and a specific image in a special mode (e.g., blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation of being controlled in a more advantageous state than in the normal mode and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 as shown in FIGS. does not change). Further, when displaying the specific image in the special mode, the specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), and the specific image can be displayed in the normal mode. When displaying the specific image, the specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) different from the first special effect element. Then, the specific image can be displayed a different number of times depending on whether the first specific effect is executed or the second specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, super In reach A, the chance up image can be displayed four times (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4), and in super reach B, the chance up image can be displayed three times (image B1, image B2, image B3). be). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is the preview image, and to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, when the specific image is displayed a plurality of times, when the specific image is displayed the second time after the specific image is displayed the first time, the first time the specific image is displayed at a high rate. 9-4 to 9-6, it is possible to display the specific image in a mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than that controlled in a more advantageous state (for example, chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4 can be executed). Therefore, even if the specific image is displayed in a mode with a low degree of expectation the first time, it is possible to have expectations for the specific image displayed the second time.

In this example, when super reach C, which has the highest degree of expectation for a big win among super reach A to C, is executed, the number of times the chance-up image is displayed is the lowest at two times, and the degree of expectation for a big win is the second highest. The number of times the chance-up image is displayed is 3 when the super reach B is executed, and the number of times the chance-up image is displayed is 4 when the super reach A with the lowest expectation for the big win is executed. ing. In this way, in this example, the chance-up image is displayed more frequently in spite of the high expectation by reducing the number of times the chance-up image is displayed for reach with a higher expectation for the big win. is prevented from becoming cumbersome. Conversely, in the case of the ready-to-win where the expectation for the big win is low, by increasing the number of times the chance-up image is displayed, the player's expectation can be maintained even if the expectation for the ready-to-win is low. .

It should be noted that the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 097IW can be configured by appropriately combining with the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 103SG. For example, the configuration for setting the set value shown in the characteristic portion 103SG and the configuration for executing a specific aspect of the predetermined effect for suggesting the setting are appropriately combined with the configuration for executing the chance-up effect shown in the characteristic portion 097IW. It is possible to configure

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, there is also a gaming machine that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is determined. A specific effect executing means capable of executing a suggested specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) (for example, at step 097IWS 104 in the effect control CPU 120, a process table including super reach A to C is selected and step 097IWS 106, S305 and an image display means (for example, a character image 097IW11, a character image 097IW21) that can display a specific image (for example, a chance up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, a character image 097IW11, a character image 097IW21) during execution of a specific effect. For example, step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including super reach A to C and chance up effect and executes steps 097IWS106 and S305), and the specific effect execution means is at least the first specific A plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including effects (for example, super reach A) and second specific effects (for example, super reach B) can be executed, and the image display means displays a specific image as a , at least a first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4) can be displayed during execution of the first specific effect, and a second specific image (for example, , image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed, and a specific image by a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode ( For example, it is possible to display a specific image in blue, green, red, rainbow colors), and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-9 to 9 -16, the display modes of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 do not change), and the image display means, when displaying the specific image in the special mode, uses the first special effect element (for example, blue, green, red , a rainbow display color effect image) can be added to display the specific image, and when displaying the specific image in the normal mode, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, a white (Effect image of display color) can be added to display the specific image (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-16), and it is expected to be controlled to an advantageous state during the execution of the first specific effect. The first specific image can be displayed in different modes (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow colors) depending on the intensity, and the first special effect element (for example, blue , green, red, and rainbow display color effect images) can be added to display the first specific image (see FIGS. Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pending display notice effect, timer effect, chance notice effect, etc.) and preparation for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed A preparation effect executing means capable of executing a production (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) is provided, and the suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect (for example, a pending display advance notice effect) and the first suggestive effect. A second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect), and a third suggesting effect (for example, a chance notice effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect. A first preparation effect (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that one suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed. , the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 11-11 (A1) and (A2)), the first preparation effect and The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when any of the second preparation effects is being executed (for example, FIG. 11 -10 reference) gaming machines are mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is the preview image, and to draw the player's attention to the specific image. Moreover, the difference in the mode of the specific image can be emphasized by the display mode of the added first special effect element. In addition, interest can be favorably maintained.

In addition, for suggestive effects and preparation effects, a special effect element (for example, an effect image with a display color according to the level of expectation) is added according to the degree of expectation that is controlled to be in an advantageous state when the image is displayed in the effect. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that the suggestive effect and the preparatory effect are advance notice effects and the degree of expectation of the effect, and the suggestive effect and the preparatory effect can also be displayed. It can draw the player's attention.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine, it is possible to make a player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, to draw the player's attention to the specific image, and to preferably maintain interest. , a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a suggestive effect that suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye A suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a preview effect, etc.), and a preparation effect (for example, a pending display advance notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) that foretells that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. possible preparation effect executing means, and the suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect), a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and the second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect). A first suggestive effect and a third suggestive effect different from the second suggestive effect (e.g., a second chance foreshadowing effect) are included, and the preparation effect is a first preparatory effect (e.g. , pending display notice preparation effect) and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect etc.) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed, and a third suggestion effect, a first preparation effect and a second preparation effect The effects can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 11-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the second preparation effect is faster than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed. There is a gaming machine in which the third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed (for example, see FIGS. 11-10). Examples of the form examples of these gaming machines will be described below as other form examples.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 153SG)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-34.

First, FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (frame) 153SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 153SG003, a glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 153SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 153SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the batted ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 153SG002R is the left game area 153SG002L by the operation of the batted ball operation handle 30. This is the game area in which a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 153SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 153SG002L is provided with a general winning port 10, and the right game area 153SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general game area 153SG002R from upstream to downstream of the right game area 153SG002R. A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 10-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

In addition, a first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 153SG005U are set on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 153SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 153SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 153SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also.

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting-switching switch 153SG052, is accommodated in the board case 153SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting-switching switch 153SG052 are housed in the board case 153SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 153SG201.

Since the substrate case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting switch 153SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 153SG003 is closed. The operation is enabled by opening the gaming machine frame 153SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who has the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch that can execute switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, with a setting key. In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 153SG201. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and arranged above the board case 153SG201. In other words, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 153SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 153SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the second 1st special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 153SG025A, second reservation display 153SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 153SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 153SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation storage, A round display 153SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) and jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 153SG002R. A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 153SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 153SG133 that lights in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 153SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A uses two types of big win symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 153SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 153SG025A and the second suspension display 153SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 153SG025A and second pending display 153SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 153SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 153SG025A is lit and the second pending When the two LEDs on the left of the display 153SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 153SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 153SG321 and a second movable body 153SG322 that are operable between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. An origin detection sensor 153SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 153SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 153SG321, and the second movable body 153SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322. An origin detection sensor 153SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 153SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big winning game state or the small winning game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, etc.) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 10-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 10-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 10-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a form is exemplified in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 10-7A and 10-7B are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". Further, when the gaming state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figures 10-8 (A) and 10-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 10-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 10-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a hit type determination random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10-9. In the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability high base state, and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big win game state by the "big win C" is a normal open big win in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 10-10 (A) and 10-10 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot. A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). assigned.

As shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), 1 to 200 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are variations of the normal reach jackpot. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1- 3).

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and 2 or more are provided as a small hit variation pattern. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total retention storage number in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for deviation (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α. , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of Super Reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (D), in the variation pattern determination table D for loss (for high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2-2) , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio, so the variable display by the variation pattern of super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from decreasing.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is not a thing, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 10-12(A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display section 153SG029A, a second display section 153SG029B, a third display section 153SG029C, and a fourth display section 153SG029D. Each of the first display portion 153SG029A to the fifth display portion 153SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 153SG029A to fifth display section 153SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 153SG029, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (B) and 10-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all game states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentages on display monitor 153SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. Further, when displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 is executed under the control of the main substrate 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 153SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 153SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 153SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 10-13(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 153SG191, a production control timer setting unit 153SG192, a production control counter setting unit 153SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 153SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative design variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 153SG194A in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIGS. 10-18) described later is secured for each storage area (entry).

The pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when the execution of the pending display announcement effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. By doing so, when the suspension memory display of the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first suspension memory display area 153SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 153SG005U, and execution of the suspension display notice effect is determined is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star ( ☆)) or special mode (for example, blue or red camera) by setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display, is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. The possibility of a ready-to-win situation and the high possibility of execution of a setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 are announced.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , symbol designating command, variation category designating command, and pending storage number notification command.

10-13(B), the command stored in the receive command buffer 153SG194A at the time of start winning shown in FIG. 10-13B is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to start -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the variable display to start are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. 10-14 is a flow chart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (153SGSa002). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (153SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (153SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), proceed to 153SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (153SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010). move on.

At 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 153SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (153SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (153SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d, RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (153SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is specified by specifying the setting value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 153SG029 can be ended.

If the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF at 153SGSa011 (153SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes of 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

At 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 153SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 153SGSa014. If the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) without executing, go to 153SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the setting value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), proceed to 153SGSa022; (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028. (153SGSa016).

Also, at 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened, the lock switch 153SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (153SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the processes 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029. (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (153SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (153SGSa026; N), the processing of 153SGSa025 and 153SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 153SG029 stops blinking (153SGSa027) and proceeds to 153SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all the segments that constitute the display monitor 153SG029 are flashed over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be blinked. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 153SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (153SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (153SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, at 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the fact that it has recovered from a power failure during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (153SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (153SGSa034; N), the processing of 153SGSa033 and 153SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 153SG029A, the second display 153SG029B, the third display 153SG029C, and the fourth display 153SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 153SG029, as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. , "E." is displayed (153SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 153SGSa032 to 153SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a store clerk, etc.), thereby displaying a display monitor 153SG029. , the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is recovered, the display monitor 153SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B notify the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON at 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined at 153SGSa014 that the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 10-15 is a flow chart showing the starting prize determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (153SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (153SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of first special figure reservation memory. 153SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (153SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103 ).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (153SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (153SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 153SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (153SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106 ).

After executing either of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start buffer value is "2" , Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the result of the variable display is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 153SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the processing of 153SGS111, a winning random number determination processing is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (153SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (153SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 153SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in 153SGS 112 of FIG. 10-15 as the winning random number determination process. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5) changes the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) to " It is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state as "big hit", whether to control to the small hit game state as the special figure display result as "small hit", and the like. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of 153SGS112. By, determination of whether or not to derive and display the big hit pattern as a special figure display result, determination of whether or not to derive and display the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, variable display mode of the decorative pattern determines whether or not is in a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pending display forewarning effect, as will be described later.

10-16 (A) in the random number value determination process shown in FIG. The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (153SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, if the starting buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), and if the starting buffer value is 2, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in (B) may be set.

After that, referring to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot determination range) according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table, the special figure extracted at 153 SGS 109 in FIGS. 10-15 It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for display result determination is within the jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 153SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that there is no jackpot at the time of variable display (153SGS123; N), it is further set to the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted by 153SGS109 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the small hit determination range, the CPU 103 generates the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the small hit determination range It is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range at 153SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it does not become a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; N), the variable display result is "miss". (153SGS125), and determines whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current game state is the time-saving state (153SGS126). If the time saving flag is not set (153SGS126; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss (153SGS127), and if the time saving flag is set (153SGS126; Y), the variation pattern for loss The decision table D is selected and set (153SGSS128).

Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is one or less, as shown in FIG. 10-11(A). In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is, as shown in FIG. be.

Incidentally, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the deviation that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 A variation pattern determination table B for loss and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. Of the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to C, in the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss, a value from 0 to 450 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. In the fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C for loss, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach within the range of possible random number values MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

For this reason, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in 153SGS132, which will be described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since it becomes a variation pattern of non-reach or super reach, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), when it is determined that it is within the jackpot determination range at 153SGS123, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot at the time of variable display (153SGS123; Y), jackpot type determination The type of jackpot is determined based on the random number MR2 for (153SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the big hit type determined in 153SGS130 is executed (153SG131), and the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining one of the plurality of big hit variation patterns. set (153SG132).

In addition, when it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range at 153SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it will be a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command according to the small hit type is transmitted. Execute the setting (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, the fluctuation pattern determination table set in the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132 and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern and is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (153SGS133). In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode, a variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" It is only necessary to provide a variation category and determine whether or not such a variation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134), the random value determination processing at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 10-17 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. Any one of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 after executing the pending display update process for updating the display mode and the number of display of the pending storage display according to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 10-13 (B) process is executed.

FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-17. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start-winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry that has been set (153SGS243).

If there is an entry whose pending display flag value is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed, the entry (153SGS242 has the pending display flag "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is set to the pending display flag of the entry determined as not being executed (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"). to end the pre-reading notice setting process (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted.

In 153SGS243, if there is no entry set to any of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242 ) indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 153SG193, for example. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to a jackpot time pending display notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the hold display. A display pattern in the case of executing the advance notice effect is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern (announcement type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-19(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245, the presence or absence of pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are changed.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (preview types) of the pending display pre-notice effect are provided: the display pattern α, the display pattern β, the display pattern γ, and the display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with a white star (☆). When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with the blue camera, and the pending display is performed. When the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U with the red camera. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55%. , the execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined, the execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%. is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and pending display notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10% Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (153SGS248), for example, the random number circuit 124 and effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, a small hit/losing hold display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending display forewarning effect and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small hit), the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and 20%. Execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%, and pending display notice in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the effect is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-19(A) and 10-19(B), in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, when the pending display notice effect is not executed In addition to being controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than, when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, than when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α The jackpot type is set to be the jackpot B or the jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for being controlled to the big win gaming state than the display pattern α and the display pattern β. is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability-variable degree of expectation for big win) for the type of big win to be big win B or big win C is the same.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIGS. The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is a loss and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the pending memory display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (blue and red camera aspects) also suggests that it is a super reach variable display capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (B), when the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach , the pending memory display is never displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 10-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the process of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 (153SGS250). When execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is set in the pending display flag of the entry and prefetched. The advance notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

10-20 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the first to fourth first special symbol reserved storage corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the illustrated Various command data and various flags (that is, variable display Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol reserved storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of matching decorative patterns (big hit pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" is determined as the stop pattern. do. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop pattern is a chance eye (3 ("334", "556", "778", etc.) are determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern, proceed to 153 SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern, the rear variable display suggestive effect during the reach effect of the variable display. and which effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable rear display is executed (153SGS278). That is, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (big hit suggestive effect and setting suggestive effect) is the variation of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only by display, and it is not executed by variable display of normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with short special figure fluctuation time.

In addition, in the super reach variable display in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestive effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a timer effect suggesting a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or that the result of the variable display will be a big hit, and suggesting a period until the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is started. , during the ready-to-win performance, which is the second half of the variable display, a jackpot suggesting performance suggesting that the result of the variable display will result in a big hit as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display, or a setting suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Suggestion production can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) has been determined in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is determined in the process of 153SGS278 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. A front part variable display suggestive effect determination process for determining which of the character effect and timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable display is executed (153SGS280). That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, execution of the suggestive effect during the variable front display is not determined unless execution of the effect during the rear variable display is determined. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, timer effects and character effects are not executed as suggestive effects during front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set to the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable rear display (as shown in FIG. 10-28 (A)). After 5 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win effect), proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, wait for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in FIG. 10-28 (B), the value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is 25 seconds 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect when the pattern TS-1 is the period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect when the pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2 which is the effect period of 30 seconds) ) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153SGS290).

FIG. 10-21 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-20. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggested effect during rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggested effect during variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-22(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the ratio determines non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, 10% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, and 0% of the ratio determines the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during variable display. Also, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, it determines non-execution of the rear variable display suggesting performance at a rate of 50%, determines the execution of the jackpot suggesting performance as the rear variable display suggesting performance at a rate of 50%, and determines the execution of the jackpot suggesting performance at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%, and determines the execution of the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of suggestive performance during variable rear display, 30% determines execution of jackpot suggestive performance as suggestive performance during variable rear display, and 70% as suggestive performance during variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

Also, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggestive effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, the game is more concerned with whether the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). If it is determined in the process of 153SGS302 that the suggestive effect during variable rear display is not to be executed, then the process of determining suggestive effect during variable rear display is terminated. , 153SGS302, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS304).

In the processing of 153SGS302, when the execution of the big hit suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestive effect is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive effect determination process during the rear variable display is performed. End (153SGS305).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-22(B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305. Of these production patterns, the pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and the pattern AS-2 is: It is a production pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the percentage of the variable display result that results in a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest percentage of the variable display result that results in a big hit. This is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the process of 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 10-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 153SGS302, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (153SGS307).

Incidentally, as the determinable effect patterns in 153SG307, as shown in FIG. 10-22(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the setting value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the setting value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 153SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set to be low, and the setting values 5 and 6 are to be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the process of 153SGS307 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 10-24. 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 The pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the setting value of 6 is confirmed.

FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-20. 10-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). Also, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

When the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestion performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the result of the variable display The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-26(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Execution of the timer effect is determined at a rate of 5% as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big win, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and suggestive effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-26(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines the execution of the character performance as the suggestive performance during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer performance as the suggestive performance during the variable front display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display at a rate of 20%.

In other words, when the execution of the set suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is being performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-25, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (153SGS315). When it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable front display is terminated, and when the execution of the suggestive effect during the variable front display is determined, the front is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (153SGS316).

When it is determined to execute a character presentation as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during variable front display is completed. (153 SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. . Among these production patterns, the pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of a big win. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS317, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. , and 80% of the time, pattern CS-2 is determined. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable part display is terminated (153SGS318).

As the effect pattern of the timer effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of variable display results that result in a big hit in image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started with the image of the character Y for 25 seconds. (See FIGS. 10-27(C), 10-29(D) and 10-29(E)).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS318, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2 rather than in pattern TS-1 (that is, timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . Also, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed as a suggestion, and the suggestion production is set as a suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as a suggestion production during the front variable display. A production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 to 10-28, when it is determined to execute the front variable display suggestive effect during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, the process data corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) and 10-28 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in the present characteristic portion 153SG are during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a longer period than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect or the setting suggesting effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-29 to 10-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) and 10-29 (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect. When the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ is determined, a new reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(C) to 10-29(E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the aspect of the camera is started, the front portion A timer effect is started as a suggestive effect during variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 25 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestive effect during variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. An update display of a timer for 30 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-30(F) to 10-30(H), when the variable display progresses with the timer update display until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big hit suggesting performance or setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (I) is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is low, such as "chance!" is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and if the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, then the pattern shown in FIG. As indicated by -30(K), a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of pattern AS-2, such as "Extremely Hot!", is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, respectively, so that they are set in the pachinko machine 1. settings are suggested. Furthermore, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice in the form of a blue or red camera, when the pre-reading notice is not executed or the reserved memory display The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or star. Therefore, the player anticipates that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, and uses the mobile terminal such as a smartphone possessed by the player to suggest setting. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the production. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the character effect as a suggestive effect during variable front display that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. As shown in -26 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the suggested effect is set as the suggested effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as the suggestive effect during the front variable display during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, it is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggesting effect by the execution.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as the timer effect, a numerical value is displayed for the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (see FIGS. 10-29 (D) and 10-29 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, by performing an increase/decrease display of a gauge, meter, etc., the rear variable display is suggested. The period until the start of execution of the effect may not be clearly notified (only an approximate period may be indicated).

Furthermore, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5 Any one of the displays in , or a combination of a plurality of aspects may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect are performed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. Although only one of them is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , both the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance may be executed as the suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is always executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not executed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-27(B) and 10-27(C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 25 seconds and a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed over a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the latter half of the super ready-to-win variable display. can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a configuration in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half of the super reach variable display, is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half of the super reach variable display.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-22, the display mode of the pending memory display as a pre-reading notice is a white rectangle or star, or a blue or red camera. In the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the pending display notice effect that can be displayed in the mode or the like can be executed, and the display mode is a blue or red camera mode, It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the blue or red camera, the player can decide whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. Since the setting-suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting-suggestion effect.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, when the pending display notice effect is executed, it corresponds to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended). Therefore, since the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the object of the pending display notice effect, the player is less likely to miss the setting suggesting effect. more can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a form in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice is a holding display notice An effect other than the effect may be made executable, and it may be suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the variable display immediately after the pending display previous notice effect is terminated) that is the target of the pending display previous notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the pending display notice effect The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-19, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is changed to the white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Since the display ratio is set lower than the display ratio, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, so that the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to attract the attention of the operator and further prevent the operator from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as the pre-reading notice effect in the form of a blue or red camera is set to the pre-reading notice effect in which the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading advance notice effect, or the pending memory display as a blue or red camera color as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before starting the setting suggesting effect, the success rate of photographing the setting suggesting effect by the player can be increased.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is made ready to shoot the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, from the speakers 8L and 8R Alternatively, the player may be separately prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect by outputting a sound or displaying a message image on the image display device 5 .

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the display pattern γ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a red camera are used to perform the pending display forewarning effect. It is executable, and as shown in FIG. 10-22 (A), when the pending memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode (when the value of the pending display flag is 3) and when the pending memory display is red The ratio of execution of the setting suggestion effect is different between the case of display in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4). In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player is more focused on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than in the case where the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, the pending memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the form in which the form does not change has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display form of the pending memory display changes from the blue camera form to the red camera form. Further, a case is provided in which the pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display changes from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It is executable, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period is suppressed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion production is set to 7 seconds longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so the super reach variable It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during execution of the ready-to-win effect).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-19, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that it is a variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-19, if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, hold display Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the blue or red camera mode as the advance notice effect, the player's attention is not focused on the pending memory display being displayed in the blue or red camera mode. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display being the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 to 10-28, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect during the front variable display including a timer effect, but it is more special than the variable display of super reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach with a short fluctuation time, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is not executed Timer effect during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the performance due to the execution of

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed, and the suggestion production is set as the suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. is set to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the variable front part It may be set so that the set suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggesting effect during display.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square, a star, or a blue and a red camera mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 10-33(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D on the image display device 5 When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, at least the reserved memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera is displayed preferentially over the effect image 153SG005E (the blue or red camera The reserved memory display in the form of (1) may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera due to the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera being blocked by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) and 10-34(B), as a modified example 153SG-3, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect for 7 seconds during variable display of normal reach and non-shortening non-reach. good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (C), it is a special variable time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3.75 seconds to 3 seconds (shorter than 5.75 seconds)) may be executed setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 153SG-4, the pending memory display is a blue camera mode The decision ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggesting effect may be different between the case of displaying in the case of displaying in the form of the red camera and the case of displaying in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice performance, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of variable display) are provided as the start timing of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of super reach. Although the setting suggestive effect is more likely to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect by executing the rear variable display suggestive effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As 5, when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 25 seconds after the variable display start. SS-3 to pattern SS-5, etc., may be executed with effect patterns suggesting high set values. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed as a suggestive effect during the front variable display and the effect that is displayed as a pending display notice effect It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by only one of the display mode of the reserved memory display. Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the set suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display in which the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is executed. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, a setting suggestion effect is performed during the big win game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, only the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect in a part of the display patterns may be restricted. For example, when the pending display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new pending display notice effect is executed. It restricts only what is executed in the display pattern α and the display pattern β (that the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Further, when the pending display forewarning effect is already executed by the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the execution of the new pending display forewarning effect by the display pattern α or the display pattern β is restricted. , the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect By limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (that the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. It is possible to make the player pay more attention.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the holding display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect Alternatively, an effect other than the pending display notice effect may be executable if it is an effect that can be executed from the timing before the target variable display starts.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above embodiment, a form in which the character effect and the timer effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, any effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 092IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 092IW will be described. In this characterizing part 092IW, a big win suggesting performance suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will be a big hit, and a preparation performance notifying that the big win suggesting performance will be executed before the big win suggesting performance is executed. It is possible. In addition, the jackpot suggestion effect that is predicted to be executed by the preparation effect is the prediction effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (the variable display that is pending execution), and the jackpot reliability in the variable display that is being executed. It may be either a forewarning effect that forewarns the degree. In this characterizing section 092IW, as the jackpot suggesting effects, it is possible to execute a pending display forewarning effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye forewarning effect. In addition, as a preparatory effect for notifying that the big hit suggesting effect will be executed before the big hit suggesting effect is executed, a pending display for notifying that the pending display notifying effect will be executed before the pending display notifying effect is executed. A notice preparation effect and a timer preparation effect for notifying that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed can be executed.

FIG. 11-1 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (step S76) in this characterizing section 092IW. In the effect control process processing in this characteristic part 092IW, the pre-reading notice effect is executed after execution of the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) in which determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed for executing the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. A pre-reading notice execution process (step 092IWS162) for execution is executed, and then one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 is executed.

FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 11-1.

In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command for one set of starting winnings has been received (step 092IWS001). Specifically, it is checked whether or not a set of start winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command are newly stored in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning. In this example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the command at the time of starting winning is received, the received command at the time of starting winning is stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning provided in RAM122. In this example, since the upper limits of the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are 4, the reception command buffer at the time of start winning has four stores corresponding to the first reserved memories and the second reserved memories. area is provided. If the command for one set of start winning has not been newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

When one set of starting winning command is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed (step 092IWS001). If the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading notice effect is executed).

If the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of pending memories is 2 or more (step 092IWS002). If the number of pending memories is not 2 or more, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading announcement effect is executed). It should be noted that whether or not the number of reserved memories is two or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the number of reserved memories notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the pending storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS003).

The pending display notice performance is a performance suggesting that the display result of the corresponding variable display will be a big win by changing the display mode of the pending memory display (and the active display) to a display mode different from the normal mode. In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a pattern of changing the display mode at the time of being displayed as the pending memory display is shown as the pending display notice effect, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and is displayed as the pending memory display. It may include a pattern that is displayed in a normal mode when it is active and changes the display mode when it is displayed as an active display. That is, it may be possible to execute the pending display announcement effect that changes the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect for notifying that the suspension display notice effect will be executed may be configured to be executable at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Also, the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display may be configured to change multiple times. In the case of such a configuration, it may be possible to execute the suspension display announcement preparation effect corresponding to each suspension display announcement effect.

FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display notice effect determination table. At step 092 IWS003, a random number for determination of effect is extracted, and the pending display notice effect determination table is referred to. Based on whether it corresponds to "super reach loss", "jackpot other than jackpot A", or "jackpot A", regarding the pending display notice effect, "no execution, pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "execution Select one of the following: Yes Reserved memory display: 1st effect mode (blue), Executed Reserved memory display: 2nd effect mode (green), and Executed Reserved memory display: 3rd effect mode (red) do.

In the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-3(A), a determination value corresponding to a random number for determination of effect is assigned for each winning determination result. Percentages of judgment values obtained are shown. In other words, for each prize-winning judgment result, the pending display notice effect is "without execution pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "executed pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)", "executed pending memory Display: 2nd effect mode (green)" and "execution pending memory display: 3rd effect mode (red)" are determined. In this example, in addition to the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the pending display notice preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. Regarding the timer effect determination table, the timer preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(B), and the chance eye preview effect determination table shown in FIG. The ratio of whether it is determined to

Features of the pending display notice effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "jackpot", compared to the case of "loss", the pending display notice effect "no execution" The determination value is assigned so that the rate of determination of "executed" is higher than that of ". In addition, in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "losing", "with execution pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)" ``With execution, reserved memory display: 2nd production mode (green)'' and ``with execution, reserved memory display: 2nd production mode (green)'' are decided to be ``with execution, reserved memory display: 3rd production mode (red)''. Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of With such a configuration, when the pending display notice effect is executed, the second effect mode (green) is preferred to the first effect mode (blue), and the third effect mode (red) is preferred to the second effect mode (green). , it will be suggested that it will be a jackpot That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of third rendering mode (red)>second rendering mode (green)>first rendering mode (blue)>no execution.

If it is determined not to execute the pending display notice effect in step S092IWS003 (N of step S092IWS004), the process proceeds to step S092IWS008, and if it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS004), the effect control CPU 120 suspends A pending display notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the display notice effect is set (step S092IWS005).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS006). The pending display advance notice preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the pending display advance notice effect will be executed before the pending display advance notice effect is executed.

FIG. 11-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table. At step 092IWS006, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table is referred to. It is determined to be either “with execution, first rendering mode (small effect)” or “with execution, second rendering mode (large effect)”.

Features of the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-3(B), in the pending display notice preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation of the effect mode of the pending display notice effect of the big hit, the more the pending display notice preparation effect is “executed”. Judgment values are assigned so that the rate of determination of "with execution" is higher than that of "without execution". In addition, in the pending display notice preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation of the effect mode of the pending display notice effect of the big hit, the higher the “executed first effect mode (small effect)”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of determination to "2 effect mode (large effect)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big win is achieved when the holding display advance notice preparation performance is executed and further when it is executed in the second performance mode (large effect) rather than the first performance mode (small effect). will be That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (large effect)>first presentation mode (small effect)>no execution.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the reserved storage number is 3 or more (step 092IWS007). If the reserved storage number is not equal to or greater than 3, the process ends. It should be noted that whether or not the number of pending memories is 3 or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the pending memory number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the number of pending memories is 3 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS008).

The timer effect suggests a period from the start timing of the target variable display to the start of execution of a specific effect (for example, a suggestive effect during the rear variable display in the characteristic part 153SG), as well as suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit. It is a performance.

In this characteristic part 092IW, the timer effect is executed during the target variable display. It is realized by setting a production control pattern and executing various production controls based on the production control pattern in the production process during variable display (S172).

In addition, not limited to the configuration of this characteristic part 092IW, for example, it is not decided whether or not to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, and whether or not to execute the timer preparation effect described later and the effect mode in the case of executing it are determined. It may be determined whether or not to execute the timer effect when the target variable display is started. Further, in this case, whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined at different ratios according to whether or not the timer preparation effect is to be executed and the effect mode.

Further, for example, the timer effect may be started during the variable display that is executed before the target variable display, or at the timing after a predetermined period has passed since the target variable display is started. You may start. That is, the timer effect may be started at an arbitrary timing from the timing of the starting winning to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, for the timer preparation effect that foretells that the timer effect will be executed, any timing from the timing of the start winning to the end of the target variable display (however, until the timing when the execution period of the timer effect can be secured) You may start with

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table. In step 092IWS008, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and the timer effect determination table is referred to. Based on whether it corresponds to either of "reach failure" and "super reach jackpot", the timer effect is set to "no execution", "execution first effect mode (25 seconds)" and "execution second effect mode (30 seconds)". second)”.

Features of the timer effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), in the timer effect determination table, when the result of determination at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "lose", the timer effect is more "not executed" than "no execution". Judgment values are assigned so as to increase the percentage of judgments of "executed". In addition, in the timer effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "losing", the "second effect with execution mode (25 seconds)" is higher than the "first effect mode with execution (25 seconds)". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage determined in "mode (30 seconds)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big win is achieved when the timer performance is executed and further when the second performance mode (30 seconds) is executed rather than the first performance mode (25 seconds). Become. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (30 seconds)>first presentation mode (25 seconds)>no execution.

If it is determined not to execute the timer effect in step S092IWS008 (N of step S092IWS009), the process proceeds to step S092IWS012, and if it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS009), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect. A timer effect flag indicating that it has been decided to execute is set (step S092IWS010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the timer preparation effect (step S092IWS011). The timer preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed.

FIG. 11-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer preparation effect determination table. In step 092IWS006, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, the timer preparation effect determination table is referred to, and based on the effect mode of the timer effect, the timer preparation effect is set to "no execution", "executed first effect mode ( (small effect)" or "executed, second rendering mode (large effect)".

Features of the timer preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-4(B), in the timer preparation effect determination table, as the effect mode of the timer effect has a higher expectation of a big hit, the timer preparation effect is more "executed" than "no execution". Judgment values are assigned so as to increase the percentage of cases where it is determined that there is a presence. Further, in the timer preparation effect determination table, as the effect mode of the timer effect has a higher expectation for a big hit, the "second effect mode with execution (character A)" is more likely than the "first effect mode with execution (character A)". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage determined to be "Character B)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big hit is achieved when the timer preparation performance is executed and further when the second performance mode (character B) is executed rather than the first performance mode (character A). become. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of second effect mode (character B)>first effect mode (character A)>no execution.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured such that the effect mode of the executable jackpot suggestive effect is different depending on which effect mode of the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), when the suspension display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the suspension display is performed in one of the first to third effect modes. When the advance notice effect is executed and the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed, the pending display advance notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), when the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed in one of the first to second effect modes. When the timer effect of the second effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed by the second effect mode. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied depending on the production mode of the preparation production, and each production form of the preparation production (that is, each expectation level) is executed in combination with other preparation production and big hit suggestion production. It is possible to suitably adjust the degree of expectation at the time.

Also, in this characterizing portion 092IW, the big hit suggestion effect is configured to be executable without executing the corresponding preparation effect. Specifically, when it is determined to execute a pending display notice effect or a timer effect, it may be determined not to execute a pending display notice preparation effect or a timer preparation effect (Fig. 11-3 (B), Fig. 11- 4(B)). And it is configured such that the easiness of execution differs depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-3, when the result of determination at the time of winning is a big hit, it is likely to be decided to execute the suspension display announcement effect and the suspension display announcement preparation effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4, it is likely to be decided to execute the timer effect. However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is not executed. With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In this characteristic part 092IW, when the preparatory performance is executed, the corresponding big hit suggestive performance is always executed. A normal preparation effect to be executed and a fake preparation effect to which the corresponding jackpot suggesting effect is not executed after the effect may be executable. In this case, when the fake suspension display advance notice preparation effect is executed, compared to when the fake suspension display advance notice preparation effect is not executed, the timer effect (may or may not be accompanied by the timer preparation effect) may be absent) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is false, and it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in this characteristic portion 092IW, the proportion of which performance mode of the jackpot suggestive effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, when the performance mode of the pending display notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, compared with the case where the first effect mode is determined, the pending display notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect are performed. The percentage of decisions to execute is high (see FIGS. 11-3(B) and 11-4(B)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye announcement effect (step 092IWS012).

The chance eye notice effect is obtained by deriving and displaying a chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decoration symbols "123") as a display result of the variable display executed before the target variable display. This is an effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display (or any of the variable displays that are not specified and that are held and stored) will be a big hit.

FIG. 11-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table. At step 092 IWS012, a random number for determination of effect is extracted, and the chance eye notice effect determination table is referred to, and the newly received command (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of start winning is "non-super reach", Either ``no execution'' or ``with execution'' is determined for the chance notice performance based on which one of ``loss of super reach'', ``jackpot other than jackpot A'', and ``jackpot A'' corresponds.

The feature of the chance eye announcement effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-5(A), in the chance prediction effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big win", compared to the case of "loss", the chance prediction effect is "not executed". The determination value is assigned so that the rate of determination of "executed" is higher than that of ". With such a configuration, it is suggested that there will be a big hit when the chance's foretelling effect is executed.

This characteristic part 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye notice effect as the jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in 11-5(A), the chance notice effect is executed when the win judgment result is executed at a lower rate than the pending display notice effect and the timer effect, and the result is a loss. Therefore, there is little difference in the execution ratio between when the winning judgment result is a big hit and when it is not. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance-eye forewarning effect than in the pending display forewarning effect and the timer effect.

When it is decided not to execute the chance eye notice effect in step S092IWS012 (N of step S092IWS013), the process proceeds to step S092IWS015, and when it is decided to execute (Y of step S092IWS013), the effect control CPU 120 A chance eye notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the eye notice effect is set (step S092IWS014).

Next, when the pending display notice effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS015), the effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display according to the determination of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS016). .

In step S092IWS016, for example, when it is determined to execute the suspension display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new suspension memory display in the normal mode, and also displays the suspension memory display. A small effect image (see, for example, the small effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 11-11(B1)) is displayed near the . Further, when it is decided to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new pending memory display in the normal mode, and an effect is displayed in the vicinity of the pending memory display. A large image (see, for example, the large effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 11-11 (A1)) is displayed.

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS017), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS017), It is checked whether or not the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (step S092IWS018). Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (Y in step S092IWS018), effect control CPU 120 executes a timer preparation effect (step S092IWS019). After that, the process ends.

In step S092IWS019 (and step S092IWS022 to be described later), for example, when it is determined that the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is to be executed, character A for notifying that the timer effect will be executed is displayed on the image display device 5. An image (see, for example, image 092IW005 of character A in FIG. 11-10(E)) is displayed. Further, when it is decided to execute the timer preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character B image for notifying that the timer effect will be executed.

When the pending display notice effect flag is not set in step S092IWS015 (N in step S092IWS015), effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display in a normal mode (step S092IWS020).

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS021), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS021), A timer preparation effect is executed (step S092IWS022). After that, the process ends.

FIG. 11-6 is a flow chart showing a pre-reading notice execution process (step 092IWS161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 11-1.

In the pre-reading notice execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the pending display notice effect flag is set (step 092IWS102) when it is time to shift the reserved storage (Y in step 092IWS101). .

When the pending display notice effect flag is set (Y in step 092IWS102), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS103).

When the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (Y in step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pending display notice preparation effect and executes the pending display notice preparation effect (step 092IWS104).

Next, when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step 092IWS105), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the timer preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS106).

When the timer preparation effect is not being executed (N of step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation effect (step 092IWS107).

Next, execution timings of the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect, and the timer effect and the timer preparation effect will be described. FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and the timer effect (preparation effect).

FIG. 11-7(A) shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 11-2), and is held at the shift timing of the hold storage. After the display announcement preparation effect is completed, the pending display announcement effect is executed (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading announcement execution process shown in FIG. 11-6).

FIG. 11-7(B) shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the timer preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS021 to 092IWS022 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 11-2), and at the start timing of the target variable display. When the timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect is started (for example, the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set in the variable display start setting process (S171), and the output control pattern is set in the variable display effect process (S172). realized by executing various production controls based on patterns).

FIG. 11-7(C) shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-2). , the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS018 to 092IWS019 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 11-2). Then, at the shift timing of the pending memory, the pending display notice preparation effect is completed and the pending display notice preparation effect is executed (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 11-6). After that, the timer preparation effect ends at the start timing of the target variable display, and the timer effect starts (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, It is realized by executing various effects control based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

FIG. 11-7(D) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-2). , the timer preparation effect is not started (for example, it corresponds to the process of step 092IWS018 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-2). Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect is completed at the shift timing of the pending memory and the pending display notice preparation effect is executed (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading notice execution processing shown in FIG. 11-6). , the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS105 to 092IWS107 of the pre-reading notice execution processing shown in FIG. 11-6). After that, the timer preparation effect ends at the start timing of the target variable display, and the timer effect starts (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, It is realized by executing various effects control based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect. FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect.

FIG. 11-8 shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning, and FIG. -7(D) corresponds to the example.

As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (A) and (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, the suspension display notice effect and the suspension display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) When the execution of the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is determined, a new suspended memory display is displayed in the normal mode in the first suspended memory display area 092IW001 and the second suspended memory display area 092IW002. be. At this time, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is started, and a lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with a large effect is displayed in the vicinity of the new suspension memory display. Note that the timer advance notice preparation effect is restricted from being executed simultaneously with the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), so it is not executed at this timing.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-8(C) to 11-8(D), when the variable display is completed and the pending storage is shifted and a new variable display is started, the pending display notification preparation is performed. The production (second production mode) is expansively completed (for example, display control is performed such that the lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with large effects acts on the reserved memory display and disappears), and the display mode of the reserved memory display changes to red. A holding display forewarning effect (third effect mode) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8(E), a timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is started, and an image 092IW005 of character A for notifying that the timer effect will be executed is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-8(F) to 11-8(G), when a new variable display targeted for the timer effect is started, the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is progressive. , and a timer effect (first effect mode) is started in which the timer is updated and displayed for 25 seconds, which is the period until the specific effect during the variable display.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect and a timer effect as a jackpot suggesting effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will result in a big win. In addition, a holding display notice preparation effect for notifying that the holding display notice effect will be executed before the holding display notice effect is executed, and a timer for notifying that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed. It is configured to be able to execute the preparation performance as the preparation performance.

Such a preparatory performance has a function of drawing attention to the big-win suggestive performance executed after the preparatory performance, but if a plurality of preparatory performances are simultaneously executed, the player's expectations are too high, resulting in a big win. If not, there is a risk that interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 092IW, simultaneous execution of a plurality of preparation effects is restricted. Specifically, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are executed in different periods and are configured not to be executed at the same time (in this example, the pending display notice preparation effect ( After the execution of the second effect mode) is completed, the timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 11-7(D)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration of this characteristic portion 092IW, the execution period of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are configured so as not to overlap at all. The execution period may be made different by making one of the end timing different.

Further, in the configuration of this characteristic part 092IW, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode), which has a lower expectation level than the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode), can be executed simultaneously with the timer preparation effect. However, not limited to such a configuration, the reservation display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is not as high as the reservation display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), but the timer preparation is performed at a predetermined ratio. It may not be executed at the same time as the presentation. Also, a plurality of preparation effects may not always be executed at the same time.

Further, for example, the effect mode of the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode with lower expectations than the second effect mode, and the effect mode of the timer preparation effect is the first effect mode with lower expectations than the second effect mode. It may be executed at the same time only in the case of the presentation mode.

Further, for example, when a plurality of preparation performances are executed simultaneously (or when a plurality of preparation performances are simultaneously executed in a second performance mode with a high degree of expectation), a big win may be determined. .

Further, in the configuration of this characteristic portion 092IW, a pattern in which the display mode of the pending memory display changes once is shown, but a pattern in which the display mode of the pending memory display (and the active display) changes multiple times is provided. When the reserved memory display (or active display) is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (specifically, a display mode in which there is a display mode with a higher degree of expectation), the retained memory An effect that suggests that the display mode of the display (or active display) will change (for example, if an arrow flies toward the reserved memory display (or active display) and pierces the reserved memory display (or active display), the change will occur. , the effect that does not change unless stabbed (may be a special effect that is executed only when the display mode of the reserved memory (or the active display) is in a display mode other than the normal mode), etc.) may be executed more frequently. , may be prevented from being executed.

Next, a description will be given of the processing for executing the chance prediction effect. FIG. 11-9 is a flow chart showing an example of the chance prediction setting process. The chance eye advance notice setting process is executed as part of the variable display start setting process (step S171) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 11-1.

In the chance prediction setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the chance prediction effect flag is set (step 092IWS201). If the chance prediction effect flag is set, the decision table is used to determine whether or not the chance prediction effect is to be executed (step 092, IWS 202).

FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-10, when neither the pending display notice preparation effect nor the timer preparation effect is being executed, the percentage of "executable" (that is, execution of the chance eye notice effect) is 100%. allow). In addition, when either the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is being executed in the second effect mode, the percentage of 20% is "executable" (that is, the execution of the chance notice effect is permitted). ), and 80% of the time, it is determined that "execution is not permitted" (that is, the execution of the chance prediction effect is not permitted). In addition, when either the pending display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is executed in the first effect mode (and neither of them is executed in the second effect mode), the ratio is 100%. , it is determined that "execution is not allowed" (that is, the execution of the chance notice effect is not permitted).

If the execution of the chance eye notice effect is permitted in step 092IWS202 (Y in step 092IWS203), the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decorative symbols "123") is determined as the stop symbol of the decoration symbol (step 092IWS204). It should be noted that, before step 092IWS204, when the stop design of the decoration design has already been determined, the stop design of the decoration design is changed to the chance eye design.

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display notice preparation effect and the chance eye notice effect. FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram showing the mode of presentation of the pending display notice preparation effect and the opportunity notice effect.

As shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A1) and (A2), the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is executed, and a lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with a large effect is displayed near the suspension memory display. Occasionally, there is a case where the execution of the chance prediction effect is permitted, and when the execution is permitted, the chance symbol (a combination of decorative symbols "123" in this example) is used as the decorative symbol stop symbol. Is displayed. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are executed simultaneously.

As shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) and (B2), the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is executed, and a small and large lightning bolt-shaped effect image 092IW004b is displayed near the pending memory display. Since execution of the chance's foretelling performance is not permitted when the game is on, a stop pattern of a decorative pattern different from the chance's pattern (combination of decorative patterns of "123" in this example) is displayed. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are not executed at the same time.

In this characteristic part 092IW, it is possible to execute a chance notice effect separately from the pending display notice effect and the timer effect as the jackpot suggestion effect, and this chance notice effect is a preparation effect such as a pending display notice preparation effect and a timer preparation effect. (that is, it is executed in a period before execution of the target variable display, see FIGS. 11-11 (A1) and (A2)). In addition, as described above, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance eye notice effect than in the pending display notice effect and the timer effect. Therefore, when the preparatory performance is being executed (that is, before the big hit suggesting performance is executed and the degree of expectation is unknown), the chance prediction performance with low expectation of the big win is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the production effect of the preparation production is lowered. Moreover, there is a possibility that the suggested degree of expectation may become difficult to understand. Therefore, the present characteristic part 092IW is configured so that the second chance notice effect is more likely to be executed when the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is not executed than when it is executed ( For example, see FIGS. 11-10). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in this characteristic part 092IW, when the preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the preparation effect of the second effect mode with higher expectation than the first effect mode is executed, the chance notice is given. It is configured such that the easiness of execution of the production is different. Specifically, the second chance notice effect is more pronounced when the pending display notice preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first effect mode (small effect). It is configured so that execution is easily permitted (see Fig. 11-10). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest while securing an opportunity to execute the chance prediction effect.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is provided. Executable suggestive effect execution means, and preparation effect execution capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, pending display advance notice preparation effect, timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. means, the suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect) and a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and the preparation effect includes a second A first preparation effect (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that one suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed. , the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect can be executed at the same time, and the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are restricted from being executed at the same time (for example, the pending display advance notice preparation The effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are not executed at the same time (see FIG. 11-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect), a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect. includes a different third suggesting effect (for example, a chance first notice effect), and the preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (for example, a hold display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed, and a second Including a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) that foretells execution of the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed in parallel during the same period. It is possible (see FIGS. 11-11 (A1) and (A2)), and when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed, the The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 11-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggestive effects include a plurality of types of first suggestive effects with different expectations (for example, pending display announcement effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggested effects. and the first suggesting effect includes a predetermined first suggesting effect and a special first suggesting effect with a higher degree of expectation than the predetermined first suggesting effect (for example, a first effect mode (blue) suspended display (including the notice effect and the pending display notice effect of the third effect mode (red)), and the preparation effect is the first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed (for example, the reserve display notice preparation effect). and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed, and the first preparation effect includes a first effect mode and the first effect as a effect mode. There is a second effect mode in which the special first suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than the mode (for example, there are a first effect mode (small effect) and a second effect mode (large effect), and a second effect mode (large effect). ) is executed, the holding display forewarning effect of the first effect mode (blue) is not executed, and the holding display forewarning effect of the third effect mode (red) is likely to be executed. 3 (B)), the execution ratio of the second preparation effect is different between when the first preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed ( For example, the timer preparation effect is executed at the same time when the pending display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode (small effect) is being executed, but the pending display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode (large effect) is executed. are not executed at the same time (see Figure 11-7). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggestive effects include a plurality of types of first suggestive effects with different expectations (for example, pending display announcement effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggested effects. and a third suggesting effect (for example, a chance forewarning effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, and the first suggesting effect includes a predetermined first suggesting effect and the predetermined first suggesting effect. Including a special first suggestive effect with a higher expectation than the effect (for example, including a first effect mode (blue) pending display notice effect and a third effect mode (red) pending display notice effect), preparation The effects include a first preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggesting effect will be executed (for example, a timer preparation effects, etc.), and the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect, and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 11-11 (A1) and (A2)); The first preparation effect has a first effect mode and a second effect mode in which a special first suggestive effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode (for example, the first effect mode (small effect)). There is a second production mode (large effect), and when the pending display notice preparation production of the second production mode (large effect) is executed, the holding display notice preparation production of the first production mode (blue) is not executed, It is easy to execute the pending display forewarning effect of the 3 effect modes (red) (see FIG. 11-3 (B)), when the first preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed The execution ratio of the third suggestive effect differs depending on when the effect is executed (for example, when the second chance preview effect is executed, the pending display preview preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect). Execution is more likely to be permitted than when executed in the first rendering mode (small effect) (see FIGS. 11-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the period during which the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed are different (for example, after the execution of the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed, the timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 11-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the first suggestive effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (eg, first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode (red), etc.). 3 (A)), and the first preparation effect has a plurality of types of effect modes (eg, first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (large effect), etc.). -3 (B)), and depending on which production mode the first preparation production is executed, the production mode of the first suggestive production that can be executed differs (for example, the first When the holding display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the holding display notice preparation effect is executed in one of the first to third effect modes, and the holding display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed. If it is done, the pending display notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, the suggestion effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect There is a case where the timer preparation effect is determined not to be executed (see FIGS. 11-3 (B) and 11-4 (B)), depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed, the ease of execution Different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3, when the winning determination result is a big hit, it is likely to be decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4 In addition, it is easy to determine if the timer effect is also executed.However, it may be determined that the timer preparation effect is not executed.Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect that does not correspond to the timer effect is executed, the pending display The timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the advance notice preparation effect is not executed). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the ratio of which suggestive effect of the effect mode is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed (for example, the effect mode of the pending display notice effect and the timer preparation effect). is determined to be the second effect mode, compared to the case of being determined to be the first effect mode, the ratio of deciding to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is high. See FIG. 11-4(B)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characteristic portion 092IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characteristic portions such as the characteristic portion 153SG to form a gaming machine. For example, the timer preparation effect indicated by the characteristic part 092IW indicates that a timer effect suggesting a period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is executed, as well as suggesting that a big hit will be achieved as indicated by the feature part 153SG. The timer performance can execute a big hit suggesting performance suggesting a big hit as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display during the ready-to-win performance or a setting suggesting performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加You may make it become.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frames 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Production control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switches 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball operating handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A game machine capable of performing a game and controlling it to an advantageous state for a player,
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state;
image display means capable of displaying a specific image and a predetermined image different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state, unlike the specific effect;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
The specific effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of specific effects including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect,
The image display means is
As the specific image, at least a first specific image corresponding to the first specific effect can be displayed and a second specific image corresponding to the second specific effect can be displayed,
It is possible to display the specific image according to the normal mode and the specific image according to the special mode that suggests that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal mode,
The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
The image display means is
When displaying the specific image according to the special mode, the specific image can be displayed using a first special effect element,
When displaying the specific image in the normal mode, the specific image can be displayed using a second special effect element different from the first special effect element,
a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect when the specific image is displayed using the first special effect element;
The notification effect executing means does not execute the notification effect when the specific image is displayed using the second special effect element,
The suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and a effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect. a third suggestive effect in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is lower than that of the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel in the same period and independently of each other,
The third suggestion is higher when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. production is easy to execute,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images